WO2019111662A1 - Film member attaching device and film member attaching method - Google Patents

Film member attaching device and film member attaching method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019111662A1
WO2019111662A1 PCT/JP2018/042127 JP2018042127W WO2019111662A1 WO 2019111662 A1 WO2019111662 A1 WO 2019111662A1 JP 2018042127 W JP2018042127 W JP 2018042127W WO 2019111662 A1 WO2019111662 A1 WO 2019111662A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
film
film member
affixing
release film
peeling
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2018/042127
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
和彦 河東
健勇 屋宜
Original Assignee
株式会社 ベアック
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 株式会社 ベアック filed Critical 株式会社 ベアック
Priority to KR1020207015749A priority Critical patent/KR20200076733A/en
Priority to CN201880078125.2A priority patent/CN111433145B/en
Publication of WO2019111662A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019111662A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C63/00Lining or sheathing, i.e. applying preformed layers or sheathings of plastics; Apparatus therefor
    • B29C63/02Lining or sheathing, i.e. applying preformed layers or sheathings of plastics; Apparatus therefor using sheet or web-like material
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B29WORKING OF PLASTICS; WORKING OF SUBSTANCES IN A PLASTIC STATE IN GENERAL
    • B29CSHAPING OR JOINING OF PLASTICS; SHAPING OF MATERIAL IN A PLASTIC STATE, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; AFTER-TREATMENT OF THE SHAPED PRODUCTS, e.g. REPAIRING
    • B29C63/00Lining or sheathing, i.e. applying preformed layers or sheathings of plastics; Apparatus therefor
    • B29C63/0004Component parts, details or accessories; Auxiliary operations
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H23/00Registering, tensioning, smoothing or guiding webs
    • B65H23/04Registering, tensioning, smoothing or guiding webs longitudinally
    • B65H23/048Registering, tensioning, smoothing or guiding webs longitudinally by positively actuated movable bars or rollers
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H26/00Warning or safety devices, e.g. automatic fault detectors, stop-motions, for web-advancing mechanisms
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H37/00Article or web delivery apparatus incorporating devices for performing specified auxiliary operations
    • B65H37/04Article or web delivery apparatus incorporating devices for performing specified auxiliary operations for securing together articles or webs, e.g. by adhesive, stitching or stapling
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H41/00Machines for separating superposed webs
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H2301/00Handling processes for sheets or webs
    • B65H2301/50Auxiliary process performed during handling process
    • B65H2301/51Modifying a characteristic of handled material
    • B65H2301/511Processing surface of handled material upon transport or guiding thereof, e.g. cleaning
    • B65H2301/5112Processing surface of handled material upon transport or guiding thereof, e.g. cleaning removing material from outer surface
    • B65H2301/51122Processing surface of handled material upon transport or guiding thereof, e.g. cleaning removing material from outer surface peeling layer of material
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H2553/00Sensing or detecting means
    • B65H2553/40Sensing or detecting means using optical, e.g. photographic, elements
    • B65H2553/42Cameras
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H2701/00Handled material; Storage means
    • B65H2701/10Handled articles or webs
    • B65H2701/17Nature of material
    • B65H2701/172Composite material
    • B65H2701/1726Composite material including detachable components
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H2701/00Handled material; Storage means
    • B65H2701/10Handled articles or webs
    • B65H2701/17Nature of material
    • B65H2701/175Plastic
    • B65H2701/1752Polymer film

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a film member bonding apparatus for bonding a film member to a member to be bonded, and a film member bonding method.
  • Patent Document 1 After peeling a release film from a film member to which a release film is peelably attached, various film member affixing devices for affixing the film member from which the release film has been peeled to a member to be attached have been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1).
  • FIG. 7 is a view showing a main part of the film member affixing apparatus 800 described in Patent Document 1 by taking it out.
  • a plastic film bonding apparatus in patent document 1, it demonstrates as a “film member bonding apparatus” in this specification.
  • the film member affixing apparatus 800 described in Patent Document 1 includes a peeling unit 830 for peeling the release film 810 from the film member 820 to which the release film 810 is peelably attached. ing.
  • the peeling unit 830 is provided with a peeling portion 840, and a folded portion 841 is formed at the tip of the peeled portion 840, and the folded portion 841 becomes a corner (wedge shaped corner). ing. Then, after the release film 810 is folded back at the folded portion 841 of the peeling portion 840, the release film 810 is configured to change in the advancing direction by the roll 850 and advance in the arrow x 'direction.
  • the peeling unit 830 when peeling the release film 810 from the film member 820, the peeling unit 830 is in a state where the film member 820 is adsorbed by an adsorption device (not shown) on the upper surface of the peeling unit 830. Slide in the arrow x direction. Thereby, the release film 810 can be peeled off from the film member 820.
  • the film member 820 adsorbed by the adsorption device is transferred to a predetermined affixing position of the affixing member (not shown) and is affixed to the affixing position.
  • the release film 810 is peeled off from the film member 820 to which the release film 810 is peelably attached, and the film member 820 from which the release film 810 is peeled off is Although it can be stuck to a to-be-adhered member, the subject which should be improved also in the peeling part 840 for peeling the release film 810 from the film member 820 remains.
  • the folded portion 841 is a corner, and the release film 810 is folded back at the folded portion 841.
  • a tension is applied to the release film along the longitudinal direction of the release film by a tension application unit such as a dancer roll, and the tension is applied.
  • a tension application unit such as a dancer roll
  • the tension is applied. It is a common practice to peel off the film member by advancing the release film in the closed state. For this reason, depending on the material of the release film 810, there is a problem that the release film 810 may be torn or broken due to the rubbing by the folded portion 841, and the release film may be broken. If the release film 810 is broken, it also leads to problems in the advancing operation of the film member and the peeling operation of the release film 40.
  • FIG. 8 is a figure shown in order to demonstrate an example of the other conventional film member affixing apparatus 900.
  • the film member affixing device 800 (refer to FIG. 7) described in Patent Document 1 is referred to as “the conventional first film member affixing device 800”, and the other film member affixing device 900 shown in FIG. It is referred to as a conventional second film member bonding apparatus 900 ".
  • FIG. 8 schematically and schematically shows the peeling portion used in the conventional second film member bonding apparatus 900. As shown in FIG.
  • a peeling section 930 is provided for peeling the release film 910 from the film member 920 to which the release film 910 is peelably attached.
  • the folded portion 931 is a corner (wedge shaped corner), and after the release film 910 is folded at the folded portion 931, the release film 910 is advanced in the arrow x direction.
  • the release film 910 is peeled off from the film member 920 to which the release film 910 is peelably attached.
  • the film member 920 when the release film 910 is peeled off, the film member 920 is not adsorbed by the suction device, but the film member 920 is slightly advanced while the release film 910 is peeled off. And the tip end 920a of the film member 920 (sometimes abbreviated as the tip end 920a) reaches the sticking start end 940a of the affixing member 940, and then the tip end 920a of the film member 920 And the table 960 is moved along the guide rails 970 in the direction of arrow x ′, and the release film folded back at the folding portion 931 is pulled in the direction of arrow x. Thus, the film member 920 is attached to the affixing member 940.
  • the release film 910 is folded back by the wedge-shaped folded portion 931, and tension is applied to the release film. Since it is applied, depending on the material of the release film 910, there is a problem that the release film 910 may be torn or broken due to the rubbing by the folded portion 841, and the release film may be broken.
  • the folded portion 931 is also considered to set the folded portion 931 as a rounded portion 931a having a roundness, as shown in a broken line frame C in FIG.
  • the relationship between the folded back portion and the affixing start end 940a of the affixing member 940 is important.
  • the reason is that, in the conventional second film member affixing apparatus 900, the accuracy of the reaching position when the leading end 920a of the film member 920 from which the release film 910 is peeled off by the folded portion 931 reaches the affixing member The reason is that high accuracy is required.
  • the film member 920 from which the release film 910 is peeled off at the folded portion 931 of the peeling portion 930 proceeds on the extension of the inclined surface 932 of the peeling portion 930.
  • the table 960 is attached to the guide rail 970 in a state where the leading end 920a of the film member 920 is pressed by the pressing roll 950 or the like. This is to move the release film 910 folded back at the folding portion 931 in the direction of the arrow x ′ while moving the release film 910 in the direction of the arrow x ′.
  • the film member 920 can not be stuck at the correct position of the affixing member 940.
  • the film member 920 from which the release film is peeled off at the folded portion 931a is peeled off.
  • the leading end 920a of the film member 920 When advancing on the extension of the inclined surface 932 of the portion 930, the distance until the leading end 920a of the film member 920 reaches the sticking start end 940a of the affixing member 940 becomes long and reaches the sticking start end 940a In the meantime, it may be bent by its own weight. Therefore, the leading end 920 a of the film member 920 can not reach the attachment start end 940 a of the affixing member 940 with high accuracy, and the film member 920 can not be accurately attached to the affixing member 940. Such a tendency becomes more pronounced as the radius of the rounding is increased.
  • the film member 920 from which the release film 910 is peeled off extends the inclined surface 932 of the peeled portion 930 as in the case of forming the rounded portion 931a.
  • the film member 920 can not reach the attachment start end 940a of the attachment member 940 with high accuracy because the distance until the attachment start end 940a of the attachment member 940 is reached becomes long. Problems will arise. For this reason, it is preferable to form the folded portion as a corner portion (particularly, a wedge shaped corner portion). However, when the folded portion is a wedge shaped corner portion, there arises a problem that the release film is easily broken as described above.
  • the problem that the release film is easily broken is not only caused by the folded-back portion of the peeling-off portion being a corner such as a wedge shape, but also long even if the folded-back portion has some roundness. There is a possibility that it may occur due to the use of a term. For this reason, such a problem is commonly present in a film member affixing device which affixes the film member to the affixing member while peeling off the release film by folding back the release film at the folding portion of the peeling portion. .
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a film member attaching apparatus and a film member attaching method which can suppress breakage of a release film by reducing tension (tension).
  • the film member affixing device of the present invention is one in which one surface is an adhesive surface, and the film member is peeled off the release film from the film member on which the release film is peelably attached.
  • the film member is attached to the affixing member while peeling off the release film starting from the affixing start end with the forward direction end of the film member pressed against the affixing start end of the affixing member
  • It is a film member affixing device which performs "the affixing operation of a film member", and a tape for mounting the affixing member
  • a film member supply mechanism for supplying the film member, a film member indexing control function for controlling the film member supply mechanism to perform the "film member indexing operation”, and
  • a control device having an adhesion control function to move at least one of the film member supply mechanism and the table relatively to
  • the release film is disposed between a tension applying unit for applying tension along the length and the tension applying unit and the peeling unit, and the release film is used as the tension applying unit and the tension applying unit.
  • the release film is clamped from the film member in active synchronization with the "pasting operation of the film member" by clamping at a predetermined position between the peeling portion and between the clamped position and the peeling portion.
  • a sticking / peeling synchronization mechanism unit for performing peeling operation is provided. .
  • the release film is clamped at a predetermined position between the tension applying portion and the peeling portion in the release film advancing mechanism portion at the time of performing the operation of attaching the film member.
  • a sticking / peeling synchronization mechanism portion is provided which performs an operation of peeling the release film from the film member in active synchronization with “the sticking operation of the film member”. For this reason, when performing the affixing operation of the film member, it is possible to perform an operation of peeling the release film from the film member in synchronization with the “affixing operation of the film member”.
  • the release film when performing the "film member pasting operation", since the release film is in a clamped state, the release film is released from the tension by the tension applying portion, and the release film is released.
  • the tension applied is only the tension between the clamper and the peeling portion. Then, in this state, since the release film is peeled off from the film member in synchronization with the attaching operation of the film member, the tension applied to the release film becomes small. For this reason, even if a large tension is added to the release film by the tension applying section, the release film is released from the tension by the tension applying section, and the tension of the release film is so large. It will not join.
  • the film member affixing device of the present invention when performing the film affixing operation, the tension applied to the release film can be reduced. As a result, the release film can be suppressed from being damaged due to the release film being rubbed at the folded back portion of the peeling portion. In addition, there is also a problem that when the film member affixing device is used for a long time, the folded portion of the peeling portion is also abraded away due to the friction with the release film, but according to the film member affixing device of the present invention It is also possible to suppress abrasion of the part.
  • actively in “actively synchronized” means, for example, “actively”. Therefore, the phrase “actively synchronizes and performs the action of peeling the release film from the film member” means, for example, “actively performs the action of synchronously peeling the release film from the film member” It can also be done.
  • the affixing / peeling synchronization mechanism portion is provided at a predetermined position between the tension applying portion and the peeling portion, and the release film is subjected to the tension applying portion.
  • a clamper which clamps at a predetermined position between the sheet and the peeling portion, and a position between the clamper and the peeling portion and attached to the film member supply mechanism side, and peeling at the peeling portion
  • a first folding roll that folds the released film forward so as to advance in substantially the same direction as the advancing direction of the film member, and is disposed between the clamper and the first folding roll and attached to the side of the table
  • the release film folded back by the first folding roll is substantially opposite to the traveling direction of the film member It is preferred to have the, second folding roll folding so as to proceed.
  • the sticking / peeling synchronization mechanism portion When the sticking / peeling synchronization mechanism portion has such a configuration, when performing the sticking operation of the film member, “sticking the film member between the position clamped by the clamper and the peeling portion. Actively synchronized to "action”, an action can be performed to strip the release film from the film member.
  • the table is provided with a lift mechanism for moving the table up and down, and the film member affixing operation is performed.
  • the control device temporarily performs the table below the vertical direction reference position when the film member performs the cueing operation of the film member.
  • Control the elevating mechanism so as to cause the film member to move downward and perform the "film member indexing operation" by the film member indexing control function at a predetermined timing until the film member attaching operation is started.
  • the film member when performing the film member indexing operation, the film member is moved downward (retracted) temporarily below the reference position in the vertical direction to perform the film member indexing operation.
  • the elevating mechanism is controlled to raise (return) the table to the reference position in the vertical direction at a predetermined timing before the paste operation starts.
  • the adhesive since the adhesive is applied to the film member from which the release film has been peeled off, the adhesive adheres to the affixing member when the film member performs the cueing operation while the table is in the vertical direction reference position. As a result, the movement of the film member is impeded, and there may occur a problem that the leading end of the film member in the movement direction can not reach the adhesion start end of the member to be adhered with high accuracy.
  • the table is temporarily lowered (retracted) below the reference position in the vertical direction when performing the indexing operation for the film member. It is preferable that the predetermined timing before the film member sticking operation starts is substantially the same timing as the end of the film member cueing operation or the same as the end of the film member cueing operation.
  • the folded portion of the peeling portion be a corner.
  • the peeling operation can be reliably performed when peeling the release film from the film member.
  • the folded-back portion of the peeling portion is a corner
  • the release film is more easily damaged and the folded-back portion of the peeling portion is also easily worn away, but the folded-back portion of the peeling portion is a corner and Even in the case where it is the case, breakage of the release film can be suppressed by reducing the tension applied to the release film.
  • the corner may be, for example, a wedge-shaped corner.
  • a feeder for performing the “film member indexing operation” is provided between the clamper and the tension applying portion.
  • the film member supply mechanism further includes a camera installed so as to be able to pick up an image of a predetermined portion of the film member, and the control device is It is preferable to further have a feeder control function of monitoring the position of the predetermined portion of the film member based on shooting data and controlling the feeder to perform the "heading operation of the film member".
  • the cueing operation of the film member can be performed with high accuracy.
  • the leading end of the film member in the traveling direction can be made to reach the attachment start end of the affixing member with high accuracy.
  • the predetermined part of the film member is a rear end portion in the traveling direction of the film member.
  • the camera so that the rear end of the film member (the film member to be attached at this time) in the traveling direction can be imaged, it is possible to provide a space for installing the camera. it can. This is because when the leading end of the film member which is to be attached at this time is to be photographed, the camera is installed in the vicinity of the leading end of the film member in the advancing direction since the pressing roll and the like exist. This is because there is no room for space.
  • the film member supply mechanism portion has a guide surface for guiding the progress of the film member from which the release film has been peeled by the peeling portion, and the guide surface
  • the guide member further has a non-adhesive surface treatment for preventing adhesion of an adhesive, and the guide member has an edge at the tip end of the guide member, and the guide surface is the adherable member. It is preferable that an acute angle is formed with respect to the member, and the attachment start end of the member to be attached is positioned on the extension of the guide surface.
  • a guide member for guiding the progress of the film member is provided on the front side of the peeling portion. Since the non-adhesive surface processing is applied to the guide surface of the guide member, the adhesive surface of the film member can be prevented from adhering to the guide surface of the guide member, and the film member It can be made to progress smoothly on the guide surface.
  • the tip end portion of the guide member is an edge
  • the guide surface forms an acute angle with the affixing member
  • the affixing member is pasted on the extension of the guide surface Since the start end is positioned, the distance between the end of the guide member and the attachment start end of the affixing member can be made as narrow as possible, and the end of the guide member and the affixing The difference in level between the attachment start end of the member and the end can be made as small as possible. This makes it possible to shorten the distance until the leading end of the film member in the traveling direction reaches the sticking start end of the affixing member, and the film member is bent by its own weight until it reaches the sticking start end. It is possible to prevent such a situation. As a result, the leading end of the film member in the traveling direction traveling on the guide surface can be made to reach the sticking start end of the member to be stuck with high accuracy.
  • the tip end portion of the film member advancing in the guide surface is also covered by this It can be made to reach the pasting end of the pasting member with high accuracy.
  • the tip of the guide member is an edge means, for example, that the tip may have an acute angle, and that the tip may be thin. There is.
  • the guide surface is preferably electrically conductive and electrically grounded.
  • the guide surface also has conductivity and is electrically grounded, even if static electricity is charged on the film member, static electricity on the film member can be removed. As a result, dust and dirt do not easily adhere to the film member, and the film member can be attached with high precision to the affixing member when the film member is attached to the affixing member. Moreover, when sending the to-be-adhered member to which the film member is attached to the next step, it is possible to prevent the static electricity from being sent to the next step while being charged.
  • the electrostatic surface of the film member contacts the conductive guide surface, whereby the static electricity on the adhesive surface is It can be removed reliably.
  • the electrostatic charge is sent between the affixing member and the film member while being charged to the next step. You can prevent that. If static electricity is charged between the adherend member and the film member, the static electricity can not be easily removed. For this reason, it is extremely effective as a countermeasure against static electricity that the static electricity charged on the adhesive surface can be reliably removed only by contacting the adhesive surface of the film member with the conductive guide surface.
  • the film member supply mechanism further includes a pressing roll for pressing the forward end of the film member in the forward direction of the affixing member.
  • the pressing roll has a configuration in which a plurality of pressing rolls are stacked in a plurality of stages, and a rotation axis of each of the plurality of pressing rolls is along the side of the leading end of the film member. It is preferable to be installed so that
  • the film member can be reliably positioned at the affixing start end of the affixing member.
  • the pressing roll it is possible to reliably press the advancing direction leading end of the film member along the side of the advancing direction leading end.
  • the leading end of the film member in the advancing direction is pressed with a uniform pressing force over the entire width direction. It is possible to securely press the leading end of the film member in the moving direction.
  • the diameter of the pressing roll positioned on the side in contact with the film member is set smaller than the diameter of the other pressing rolls. Is preferred.
  • the pressing roll By setting the diameter of the pressing roll positioned on the side in contact with the film member in this way, even if the distance between the leading end of the guide member and the sticking start end of the affixing member is narrow, the pressing roll Since the diameter is small, it is possible to reliably press the leading end of the film member in the traveling direction without contacting the guide member. In addition, since the warp of the holding roll having a small diameter can be prevented, the leading end of the film member in the traveling direction can be held down with a uniform pressing force over the entire width direction of the film member.
  • the tension applying portion is preferably a dancer roll.
  • the tension applying unit is a dancer roll, it is possible to apply a tension to the release film, and at the time of indexing of the film member and at the time of attaching operation of the film member, indexing operation of the film member or The film member attaching operation and the winding operation of the release film by the winding roll do not have to be synchronized, and each operation can be performed independently.
  • the film member is in the form of a long sheet, and the release film is left for each predetermined length along the longitudinal direction of the long sheet film member. It is preferable that a slit is provided, and the release film is peeled off by the peeling portion to form a singulated film member, and the singulated film member is attached to the affixing member .
  • the film member is a polarizing film or a protective film used for a liquid crystal panel or an electromagnetic wave shielding film used for an electronic device
  • the affixing member is the liquid crystal It is preferable that it is a glass substrate or a synthetic resin substrate used for a panel or an electronic circuit substrate used for an electronic device.
  • the polarizing film or the protective film used for the liquid crystal panel can be precisely attached to the glass substrate or the synthetic resin substrate used for the liquid crystal panel, or the electromagnetic wave shielding film used for the electronic device Since the liquid crystal panel can be precisely attached to an electronic circuit substrate used in an electronic device, a high-quality liquid crystal panel or an electronic device can be manufactured.
  • the film member affixing method of the present invention is such that the film member has one surface as an adhesive surface and the release film is peeled off from the film member on which the release film is peelably attached.
  • the film member is attached to the affixing member while peeling off the release film starting from the affixing start end with the forward direction end of the film member pressed against the affixing start end of the affixing member.
  • the lum member affixing device includes a table on which the affixing member is placed, a film member supply mechanism for supplying the film member, and the film member supply mechanism for performing the "film member indexing operation”.
  • the film member supply mechanism portion has a folded portion that folds the release film back in a direction substantially opposite to the traveling direction of the film member, and the release film is folded at the folded portion; The film is relatively moved by relatively moving at least one of the film member supply mechanism and the table.
  • a release film for removing the release film from the film member, and a release film advancing mechanism for advancing the release film folded back at the folded portion, and the release film advancing mechanism comprises the released release folded back When it is disposed between a tension applying unit that applies a tension along the direction in which the release film advances to the film, and the tension applying unit and the peeling unit, and the “film member sticking operation” is performed In the above, the release film is clamped at a predetermined position between the tension applying portion and the peeling portion, and the "film member sticking operation” is actively performed between the clamped position and the peeling portion.
  • the same effect as the film member affixing device of the present invention described in the above [1] can be obtained.
  • FIG. It is a figure shown in order to demonstrate the film member affixing apparatus 1 which concerns on Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. It is a figure shown in order to demonstrate the polarizing film 30 (the polarizing film 30 in the state to which the release film 40 is stuck).
  • FIG. It is a figure shown in order to explain operation of film member pasting device 1 concerning an embodiment.
  • FIG. It is a figure shown in order to demonstrate an example of the conventional other film member affixing apparatus 900.
  • the film member affixing device 1 advances the film member while peeling off the release film from the film member to which the release film is peelably attached to the adhesive surface, and the release film is peeled off After performing the "heading operation of the film member" for causing the forward end of the advancing direction to reach the attaching start end of the affixing member, the advancing end of the advancing direction of the film member is pressed against the affixing beginning of the adherend It is a film member affixing device which performs "film member affixing operation" which affixes a film member to a member to be affixed while peeling off a release film starting from an affixing start end.
  • a film member is stuck on the said film member affixing surface on the basis of the sticking starting end in the film member affixing surface of a member to be stuck
  • a film member affixing is carried out For example, it is described as “the film member is stuck starting from the sticking start end of the member to be stuck,” or simply “the film member is stuck to the member to be paste” It is written that it will be
  • the film member is a polarizing film used for a liquid crystal panel
  • the affixing member is a glass substrate used for a liquid crystal panel
  • the size of the film member (polarizing film) is not particularly limited.
  • the member to be bonded (glass substrate) has, for example, a long side Vertical) A relatively large size of 1500 mm ⁇ short side (horizontal) of about 900 mm, with a margin of about 5 mm from the side in the lateral direction and the side in the longitudinal direction of the member to be attached having such a size It is assumed to have a size that can be attached (for example, a long side (longitudinal) 1490 mm ⁇ short side (lateral) about 890 mm).
  • a liquid crystal panel has a configuration in which polarizing films having polarization directions orthogonal to each other are attached to two glass substrates (a glass substrate on the front side and a glass substrate on the back side) provided on the front side and the back side of a liquid crystal layer.
  • a polarizing film is bonded to a glass substrate used for one of the front side glass substrate and the rear side glass substrate.
  • the film member bonding apparatus 1 which concerns on embodiment is demonstrated in detail.
  • film member may be described as “polarizing film”, and “member to be adhered” may be described as “glass substrate”.
  • the said polarizing film points out a “film member”, and when it is described as a “glass substrate”, the said glass substrate Indicates a "member to be adhered”.
  • FIG. 1 is a figure shown in order to demonstrate the film member affixing apparatus 1 based on Embodiment 1.
  • FIG. 1 is a figure which shows the film member affixing apparatus 1 concerning Embodiment 1 typically.
  • the film member affixing device 1 according to the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, is a table 100 on which the glass substrate 10 is placed, a film member supply mechanism 200 for supplying a polarizing film 30 (film member), and It has the control apparatus 300 which has a control function for controlling each component of the film member affixing device 1 which concerns on a form.
  • the detailed configurations and operations of the table 100 and the film member supply mechanism unit 200 will be described later.
  • the control function which the control apparatus 300 has is also mentioned later.
  • the polarizing film is moved by moving the table 100 (moving in the xx ′ direction along the x axis) with the film member supply mechanism 200 fixed. It is assumed that the operation of attaching 30 to the glass substrate 10 is performed.
  • the film member supply mechanism unit 200 has the peeling portion 210 having a folded portion 211 that folds the release film 40 in the direction substantially opposite to the traveling direction of the polarizing film 30, and the release film 40 folded at the folded portion 211 of the peeling portion 210. And a release film advancing mechanism 220 for advancing in the release film advancing direction.
  • the “release film advancing direction” is a direction (arrow x direction) in which the release film 40 folded back at the peeling section 210 advances.
  • the folded back portion 211 may be a corner, and the corner may have a slight roundness at the tip.
  • the release film 40 is removed from the polarizing film 30 by moving the table 100. Acts to peel off.
  • the film member supply mechanism unit 200 includes a guide member 230 having a guide surface 231 for guiding the progress of the polarizing film 30 from which the release film 40 is peeled off by the peeling unit 210, and a tip 30a of the polarizing film 30 in the traveling direction.
  • a guide member 230 having a guide surface 231 for guiding the progress of the polarizing film 30 from which the release film 40 is peeled off by the peeling unit 210, and a tip 30a of the polarizing film 30 in the traveling direction.
  • the leading end 30a may be abbreviated, it may be pressed when the leading end 30a of the polarizing film 30 is attached to the pasting end 10a when the leading end 10a of the glass substrate 10 is reached.
  • It has the roll 240 and the camera 250 installed so as to be able to image a predetermined portion (described later) of the polarizing film 30.
  • auxiliary rolls 261 and 262 for causing the polarizing film 30 (the polarizing film 30 with the release film 40 attached thereto) to bend and advance. It is provided.
  • a delivery mechanism section for delivering the polarizing film 30 (the polarizing film 30 in the state where the release film 40 is attached) and a dancer roll provided in the middle of the traveling path, but these are not shown. .
  • the polarizing film 30 is in a state of reaching the attachment start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 (in a state of being pointed out), and the table 100 is the attachment start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10. The case where it has moved to the position which performs the operation
  • the front end portion 30 a of the polarizing film 30 from which the release film 40 is peeled is made to reach the affixing start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10.
  • the operation may be referred to as "the polarizing film 30 cueing operation”.
  • the release film 40 is peeled off with the sticking start end 10a as a starting point in a state where the leading end 30a of the polarizing film 30 in the advancing direction is pressed against the sticking start end 10a of the glass substrate 10.
  • the operation of attaching the polarizing film 30 to the glass substrate 10 may be referred to as “the attaching operation of the polarizing film 30”.
  • FIG. 1 the case where the holding
  • the polarizing film 30 (the polarizing film 30 in a state where the release film 40 is attached) is bent downward at a large angle by the advancing auxiliary roll 261, and then xy by the advancing auxiliary roll 262. It bends so that it may become a predetermined angle (in the film member pasting device 1 concerning an embodiment, it makes 30 degrees) to a plane, and it reaches the exfoliation part 210.
  • the said angle is not limited to 30 degree
  • the polarization film 30 (the polarization film 30 in the state where the release film 40 is attached) is bent downward in the traveling direction by the traveling auxiliary rolls 261 and 262 on the traveling path of the polarizing film 30.
  • the traveling direction of the polarizing film 30 is generally taken as a direction (arrow x 'direction) from the right to the left in the drawing along the x-axis. Therefore, in the present specification, when the traveling direction of the polarizing film 30 is described, it is described as "arrow x 'direction along x axis" or "right to left direction in the drawing".
  • the inside of the broken line frame A in FIG. 1 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the polarizing film 30 (the polarizing film 30 in a state where the release film 40 is attached).
  • the configuration of the polarizing film 30 (the polarizing film 30 in a state where the release film 40 is attached) will be described with reference to FIG.
  • FIG. 2 is a figure shown in order to demonstrate the polarizing film 30 (The polarizing film 30 in the state to which the release film 40 is stuck).
  • FIG. 2 (a) is a plan view
  • FIG. 2 (b) is a side sectional view.
  • FIG. 2 is a figure which shows typically and thickness etc. are exaggerated and drawn.
  • the polarizing film 30 has a long shape, and a long release film 40 is peelably attached.
  • the polarizing film 30 is cut at predetermined lengths leaving the release film 40 so that the polarizing film 30 can be singulated to the size corresponding to the individual glass substrate 10 (see FIG. 1) to be attached. ing.
  • a release film is provided for each long side (1490 mm) of the polarizing film 30. Cuts C1, C2, ... are provided leaving 40.
  • the adhesive 31 is applied to the polarizing film 30, when the release film 40 is peeled off from the polarizing film 30, the adhesive 31 is exposed on one surface (referred to as the lower surface) of the polarizing film 30. It will be. Note that the surface of the polarizing film 30 on which the adhesive 31 is applied is referred to as an “adhesion surface”.
  • the individual polarizing films are sequentially taken from the left side in FIG. 30, the second polarizing film 30, and so on.
  • the cuts C1, C2,... May be the rear end in the traveling direction (hereinafter abbreviated as the rear end) in each polarizing film 30, and may also be the front end.
  • the cut C1 is the rear end 30b of the first polarizing film 30, and in the case of focusing on the second polarizing film 30, the cut C1 is It becomes the tip 30 a of the second polarizing film 30.
  • the table 100 is capable of reciprocating on the guide rails 60 laid on the stage 50 along the x-axis in the direction of the arrow x-x '.
  • the table 100 has a slider 110 capable of traveling on the guide rail 60 and a table main body 120 attached on the slider 110.
  • the table main body 120 mounts the glass substrate 10 (member to be bonded).
  • the table body 120 is capable of reciprocating along the x-axis with the slider 110, and moves along the y-axis, rotates on the xy plane, and along the z-axis with respect to the slider 110. It is possible to go up and down.
  • the y-axis direction position adjustment mechanism that enables the position adjustment of the table main body 120 along the y-axis, and the rotation angle adjustment of the table main body 120 on the xy plane are possible.
  • An angle adjustment mechanism and an elevation mechanism capable of raising and lowering the table main body 120 along the z-axis are provided. Since various mechanisms can be adopted for the y-axis direction position adjusting mechanism, the rotation angle adjusting mechanism, and the elevating mechanism, the illustration and description of the respective mechanisms will be omitted. Further, the reciprocation control along the x axis of the slider 110, the position adjustment control in the y axis direction of the table main body 120, the rotation angle adjustment control, and the elevation control are performed as control functions of the control device 300.
  • the table 100 includes the slider 110 and the table main body 120. However, in this specification, these may be collectively described as the "table 100". Therefore, for example, the fact that the table 100 moves along the x axis means that the slider 110 and the table main body 120 move together along the x axis, and the table 100 is the z axis. In fact, the table body 120 moves up and down along the z-axis with respect to the slider 110. Moreover, in the film member bonding apparatus 1 which concerns on embodiment, the slider 110, the table main-body part 120, the stage 50, and the guide rail 60 shall be metal, such as iron, for example.
  • the release film advancing mechanism 220 advances the release film 40 folded back at the peeling part 210 in a direction substantially opposite to the advancing direction of the polarizing film 30 (release film advancing direction).
  • the release film 40 advances with respect to the release film 40 folded back by the sticking / peeling synchronization mechanism 221 (details will be described later) and the folding part 211 of the peeling part 210.
  • a tension applying unit (a dancer roll 222 in the film member affixing device 1 according to the embodiment) for applying a tension along a direction (release film advancing direction), and a plurality of advance assisting rolls (for example, an advance assisting roll) 223, 224), a feeder 225 for performing a cueing operation of the polarizing film 30, and a take-up roll provided on the further downstream side of the dancer roll 222 (the front side in the release film advancing direction) (Not shown) etc. are provided.
  • the sticking / peeling synchronization mechanism unit 221 is disposed between the dancer roll 222 as a tension applying unit and the peeling unit 210.
  • the release film 40 is clamped at a predetermined position between the dancer roll 222 and the peeling portion 210, and polarization is performed between the clamped position and the peeling portion 210.
  • the release film 40 is peeled off from the polarizing film 30 in active synchronization with the affixing operation of the film 30.
  • the operation of peeling the release film 40 from the polarizing film 30 may be abbreviated as “the peeling operation of the release film 40”.
  • the release film 40 is provided between the dancer roll 222 and the peeling part 210.
  • the release film 40 which is located between the clamper 221c which clamps at a predetermined position, the clamper 221c and the peeling part 210 and is attached to the film member supply mechanism 200 side and peeled off by the peeling part 210 is
  • the first folding roll 221a is folded back so as to advance in substantially the same direction as the advancing direction of the polarizing film 30, and is disposed between the clamper 221c and the first folding roll 221a and attached to the table 100 side.
  • the first folding roll 221a Since the first folding roll 221a is attached to the film member supply mechanism 200 side, the position does not change even if the table 100 moves. On the other hand, since the second folding roll 221b is attached to the side of the table 100 (specifically, the slider 110 of the table 100), the second folding roll 221b moves along with the movement of the table 100 (slider 110) in the x-x 'direction.
  • the clamper 221c clamps the release film 40 when performing the operation of attaching the polarizing film 30 to the glass substrate 10, but when performing the indexing operation of the polarizing film 30 by the feeder 225, the release is performed. The clamp of the film 40 is released.
  • the specific operation of the pasting / peeling synchronization mechanism section 221 configured in this way will be described later.
  • the clamp / clamp release operation of the release film 40 by the clamper 221c and the cueing operation of the polarizing film 30 by the feeder 225 are performed as one of the control functions of the control device 300.
  • the feeder 225 is provided between the clamper 221c and the advancing auxiliary roll 223, and has a function for causing the leading end 30a of the polarizing film 30 from which the release film 40 has been peeled to reach the attachment start end 10a of the glass substrate 10. That is, it has a function to perform the cueing operation of the polarizing film 30.
  • the feeder 225 has a plurality of clampers 226 for clamping the release film 40, and can reciprocate in the direction of the arrow x-x 'along the x-axis.
  • Control of the feeder 225 is performed as one of the control functions of the controller 300.
  • the control device 300 monitors the position (position along the x-axis) of a predetermined portion (for example, the rear end 30b) of the polarizing film 30 based on the imaging data from the camera 250.
  • the feeder 225 is controlled so that the portion 30 a reaches the attachment start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10.
  • the control device 300 sets a polarizing film (first polarizing film 30) to be attached at this point based on shooting data from the camera 250. Monitoring the position of the rear end 30b (the cut C1 between the first polarizing film 30 and the second polarizing film 30) until the position of the rear end 30b (the cut C1) reaches the target position , Feeder 225 is operated.
  • a polarizing film first polarizing film 30
  • the position of the rear end 30b of the polarizing film 30 when the front end 30a of the polarizing film 30 correctly reaches the attachment start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 is previously determined as the "target position".
  • the control device 300 advances the release film 40 in the release film advancing direction until the position of the rear end 30b (the cut C1) of the first polarizing film 30 to be attached at this point reaches the target position.
  • the first polarizing film 30 can be pointed out with high accuracy. That is, the leading end 30 a of the polarizing film 30 can be made to reach the bonding start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 with high accuracy.
  • the camera 250 monitors the position of the rear end 30b (the cut C1) of the first polarizing film 30 to be bonded at the present time. However, if the camera 250 is to be installed at a position where the position of the leading end 30a of the first polarizing film 30 to be attached at this time is to be monitored, the presence of the pressing roll 240 (FIG. This is because there is not enough space for installing the camera 250, etc.). However, if there is enough space for installing the camera 250, the position of the leading end 30a of the first polarizing film 30 to be attached at this point may be monitored.
  • FIG. 3 is a figure shown in order to demonstrate the guide member 230 and the press roll 240.
  • FIG. 3 (a) is an enlarged view of the range enclosed by the broken line frame B in FIG. 1 and the pressing roll 240 of FIG. 1
  • FIG. 3 (b) is a view along FIG. 3 (a) along the z axis. It is the figure (plan view) seen from the top.
  • the pressing roll 240 and the like shown in FIG. 3 (a) are not shown.
  • the guide member 230 has a guide surface 231 for guiding the progress of the polarizing film 30 from which the release film 40 has been peeled off. Since FIG. 3 is also a schematic view as in FIG. 1, the attachment structure of the guide member 230 is not shown, but the guide member 230 is a support member standing from the stage 50 (see FIG. 3). Not shown). The support member is also made of metal such as iron.
  • the guide member 230 is formed of, for example, a metal such as stainless steel, and the guide surface 231 (the surface on the side in contact with the polarizing film 30) of the guide member 230 has non-adhesiveness. .
  • the non-adhesive surface process which has non-adhesiveness in the state which maintained electroconductivity is given to the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230.
  • FIG. As described above, the non-adhesive surface processing is performed on the guide surface 231 because one surface of the polarizing film 30 is an adhesive surface on which the adhesive 31 (see FIG. 2) is applied.
  • the adhesive 31 is applied to the adhesive surface of the polarizing film 30 in a state in which the release film 40 is peeled off, the non-adhesive surface processing for preventing the adhesive 31 from adhering to the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230 If not applied, the adhesive 31 of the polarizing film 30 adheres to the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230, and the polarizing film 30 can not progress smoothly along the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230. is there.
  • the non-adhesive surface treatment for preventing the adhesion of the adhesive 31 is a known technique, and for example, a technique of surface treatment called “TOICAL (registered trademark) S coating treatment” can be adopted.
  • TOICAL registered trademark
  • S coating treatment By applying such surface treatment (Tosical (registered trademark) S coating film formation / Tosico Co., Ltd.) to the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230, the adhesive surface of the polarizing film 30 from which the release film 40 is peeled is a guide Without adhering to the guide surface 231 of the member 230, the polarizing film 30 can be smoothly advanced to the adhesion start end 10a of the glass substrate 10.
  • Toshikal (registered trademark) S for example, those of UNA-300 series (UNA-310-X10), UNA-800 series, TS-1000 series, TS-1080 series, TS-1310 series should preferably be used. it can.
  • the film thickness of the coating film of Toshikal (registered trademark) S is, for example, 1 ⁇ m to 200 ⁇ m, preferably 3 ⁇ m to 150 ⁇ m.
  • An uneven structure may be formed on the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230 before forming the coating film of Toshikal (registered trademark) S.
  • the average surface roughness of the concavo-convex structure in this case is preferably 2 ⁇ m to 15 ⁇ m.
  • the adhesive surface of the polarizing film 30 from which the release film 40 is peeled does not adhere to the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230.
  • the film 30 can be smoothly advanced to the adhesion start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10.
  • Such surface processing is non-adhesive surface processing without loss of conductivity. Therefore, the guide surface 231 is such that the conductivity is maintained even after the non-adhesive surface processing is performed. For this reason, the conductivity of the guide surface 231 is not impaired.
  • the guide surface 231 is electrically grounded. That is, the guide surface 231 has conductivity and is grounded. The reason why the guide surface 231 is conductive and grounded will be described later.
  • the guide member 230 has a triangular block shape, and the tip end portion 232 of the guide member 230 is an edge, and the guide surface 231 is the glass substrate 10 It is arranged to make an acute angle to.
  • the distal end portion 232 of the guide member 230 will be referred to as “guide member distal end portion 232”.
  • the position where the bonding start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 is on the perpendicular L passing through the pressing point P of the pressing roll 240 (pasting operation When it reaches a start position, it is installed so that pasting start end 10a of glass substrate 10 may be located on extension of guide surface 231.
  • the guide member 230 is a position along the z-axis that does not contact the glass substrate 10 placed on the table 100, and a step between the guide member distal end portion 232 and the glass substrate 10 Is placed at a position where the
  • the “pressure point P” of the pressing roll 240 refers to a point that applies a pressing force to the polarizing film 30 when the pressing roll 240 performs an operation of pressing the polarizing film 30.
  • the inclination angle of the guide surface 231 that is, the angle ⁇ between the guide surface 231 and the xy plane (the angle ⁇ between the guide surface 231 and the glass substrate 10 mounted on the table 100) is an embodiment.
  • it shall be set as 30 degrees.
  • the angle ⁇ between the guide surface 231 and the glass substrate 10 is not limited to 30 degrees, as long as the leading end 30 a of the polarizing film 30 can smoothly reach the bonding start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10.
  • the installation position of the guide member 230 is the distance between the tip end portion 232 of the guide member 230 and the adhesion start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 when the adhesion start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 reaches the adhesion operation start position It is preferable that the distance d) along the x axis be set as narrow as possible.
  • interval d changes with the inclination angles of the guide surface 231, etc., in the film member affixing apparatus 1 which concerns on embodiment, the space
  • the distance d is not limited to 15 mm, and can be set to an optimal value according to the angle of the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230 with respect to the xy plane, the material and size of the polarizing film 30, and the like.
  • the guide member 230 is electrically grounded. Specifically, as described above, the guide member 230 is attached to a support member (not shown) erected on the stage 50 (see FIG. 1), and these support member and the stage 50 Since both are made of metal, the guide member 230 is electrically grounded via the support member and the stage 50. For this reason, the guide surface 231 which the said guide member 231 has will be earth
  • FIG. 1 demonstrated previously is a figure which shows the film member affixing apparatus 1 concerning Embodiment 1 typically, although it does not show about the specific installation state of the stage 50, etc., the stage 50 It shall be installed in the state where it was electrically grounded to the floor of a factory etc. (earth).
  • the guide member 230 including the guide surface 231 is electrically grounded via the support member and the stage 50.
  • the distance between the guide member distal end portion 232 and the adhesion start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 can be made as narrow as possible. While being possible, the level
  • the guide member 230 is installed so that the adhesion start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 is positioned on the extension of the guide surface 231, the tip end of the polarizing film 30 traveling on the guide surface 231 is also thereby 30a can be made to reach the bonding start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 with high accuracy.
  • the guide member 230 is formed of metal such as stainless steel, and the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230 has conductivity and is electrically grounded (earthed). Therefore, even when static electricity is charged on the polarizing film 30, the static electricity charged on the polarizing film 30 can be removed. As a result, dust and dirt are less likely to be attached to the polarizing film 30, and the film member is attached to the glass substrate 10 with high accuracy when performing the operation of attaching the polarizing film 30 to the glass substrate 10 as a member to be attached. It can be pasted. In addition, when the glass substrate 10 to which the polarizing film 30 is attached is sent to the next process, it is possible to prevent the static electricity from being sent to the next process while being charged.
  • the adhesive surface of the polarizing film 30 (specifically, the adhesive 31 applied to the polarizing film 30), the adhesive surface of the polarizing film 30 (the surface on which the adhesive 31 is applied) By contacting the conductive guide surface 231, the static electricity charged on the adhesive surface (adhesive 31) can be reliably removed.
  • the electrostatic charge is sent between the glass substrate 10 and the polarizing film 30 to the next step in a state of being charged. You can prevent that.
  • the presser roll 240 has a configuration in which two rolls 241 and 242 having different diameters are stacked in two stages along the perpendicular line L (two-stage stacked configuration),
  • the rotary shafts 241 a and 242 a are disposed in a direction along the front end 30 a of the polarizing film 30 (a direction along the y-axis).
  • the rotary shafts 241 a and 242 a of the first pressing rolls 241 and 242 are rotatably attached to the pressing roll attachment member 243.
  • the pressing roll attachment member 243 is attached to the film member supply mechanism 200.
  • the diameter ⁇ 1 (see FIG. 3A) of the first pressing roll 241 is set smaller than the diameter 22 of the second pressing roll 242.
  • the diameter 11 of the first pressing roll 241 is about 10 mm.
  • the presser roll 240 (the first presser roll 241 and the second presser roll 242) configured in this way, together with the presser roll mounting member 243, can move up and down in the direction along the z axis (the direction of the arrow zz ').
  • the film member affixing device 1 does not perform the affixing operation of the polarizing film 30, it is in a plane (xy plane) including the glass substrate 10 placed on the table 100.
  • the polarizing film 30 is pasted, it is lowered to perform an operation of pressing the polarizing film 30.
  • the raising and lowering operations of the pressing roll 240 are performed as one of the control functions of the control device 300.
  • the distance d between the guide member distal end portion 232 and the bonding start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 is as narrow as 15 mm as described above.
  • the pressing force for pressing the polarizing film 30 is the entire width direction of the polarizing film 30 (in this case, the width along the y axis) only with the first pressing roll 241 There is a problem that it may not be uniformly applied over the
  • the length of the polarizing film 30 in the width direction is about 890 mm in this case.
  • the length in the width direction (direction along the y-axis in FIG. 3) of the polarizing film 30 is as long as about 890 mm, the length along the rotation axis 241 a of the first pressing roll 241 ( The length along the y-axis also increases.
  • the diameter 11 is smaller than the length of the first presser roll 241 along the rotation shaft 241a, warpage may occur, and if warpage occurs, the pressing force extends over the entire width direction. It will not be applied uniformly.
  • the first pressing roller 241 with a small diameter is provided so that the pressing force by the pressing point P is uniformly applied over the entire width direction of the polarizing film 30.
  • the second pressing roll 242 having a large diameter is stacked on top of the other.
  • the first presser roll 241 contacts the guide member 230 even if the distance d between the guide member tip portion 232 and the attachment start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 is as narrow as 15 mm. Therefore, the polarizing film 30 can be reliably pressed. Further, the second holding roll 242 can prevent the first holding roll 241 from being warped, so that the polarizing film 30 can be reliably held with uniform pressing force over the entire width direction (y-axis direction). Thus, the second pressing roll 242 functions as a backup roll for backing up the pressing force of the first pressing roll 241.
  • FIG. 4 is a figure shown in order to demonstrate the operation
  • FIG. 5 is a figure shown in order to demonstrate the operation
  • FIG. 4A shows a state before the start of the paste operation, and this state is referred to as this initial state.
  • the table 100 is at a position (start position) on the left side of the drawing with respect to the pressing roll 240 (the first pressing roll 241 and the second pressing roll 242).
  • the glass substrate 10 (referred to as the first glass substrate 10) to be attached at this time is placed at a predetermined position on the table 100.
  • the amount of movement of the table 100 from the start position along the x axis, the position along the y axis, the angle around the z axis (angle on a plane), and the like are properly adjusted.
  • the vertical position of the table 100 along the z-axis is assumed to be the vertical reference position h.
  • the release film 40 has a leading end (not shown) on the take-up side connected to a take-up roll (not shown) for taking up the release film 40, and is to be attached at this time
  • the tip 30 a of the polarizing film (referred to as the first polarizing film 30) is assumed to reach the tip (folded portion 211) of the peeling portion 210.
  • the presser roll 240 (the first presser roll 241 and the second presser roll 242) is disengaged (upward from the plane (xy plane) including the glass substrate 10 placed on the table 100. Position).
  • the control device 300 controls the table 100 to advance in the right direction (arrow x direction) along the x axis by a predetermined movement amount.
  • the table 100 advances to the position shown in FIG. 4B (the paste operation start position).
  • the control device 300 moves the table 100 in the right direction along the x axis so that the attachment start end 10 a of the first glass substrate 10 reaches a position facing the pressing point P of the pressing roll 240 ( It is controlled to move in the arrow x direction).
  • the glass substrate to be bonded is the “first glass substrate 10”, but the “first” may be omitted and described as “the glass substrate 10”.
  • the control device 300 performs the cueing operation of the first polarizing film 30 by the film member cueing control mechanism of the control device 300, but before the cueing operation of the first polarizing film 30 is performed, The control device 300 causes the table elevating control function of the control device 300 to move the table 100 by a predetermined amount ⁇ h (see FIG. 4B) along the z-axis rather than the vertical direction reference position h. Control to lower (retract).
  • the polarizing film to be attached is the “first polarizing film 30”, but the “first” may be omitted and described as “polarizing film 30”.
  • the table 100 is positioned at a position where the adhesion start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 faces the pressing point P of the pressing roll 240. Also, the position is lower than the vertical direction reference position h by a predetermined amount ⁇ h along the z-axis.
  • predetermined amount ⁇ h means that the front end portion 30 a of the polarizing film 30 that has been pointed out is placed on the glass substrate 10 placed on the table 100 when performing the cueing operation of the polarizing film 30. It may be of such an extent that contact can be reliably prevented, for example, several mm to several tens of mm.
  • the “predetermined amount ⁇ h” is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set to an optimal amount.
  • the control device 300 controls the feeder 225 to perform the cueing operation of the polarizing film 30 by the film member cueing control function of the control device 300.
  • the feeder 225 clamps the release film 40 by the clamper 226 and advances the release film 40 by a predetermined amount in the release film advancing direction (arrow x direction).
  • the control device 300 performing such control, the leading end 30 a of the polarizing film 30 from which the release film 40 has been peeled reaches a position where the leading end 30 a of the glass substrate 10 faces the sticking start end 10 a. That is, the operation for picking up the polarizing film 30 is performed.
  • the leading end 30 a of the polarizing film 30 does not contact the attachment start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10.
  • the control device 300 controls the clamper 221c of the affixing / peeling synchronization mechanism portion 221 to release the clamp of the release film 40.
  • the cueing operation of the polarizing film 30 will be specifically described.
  • the release film 40 is advanced in the release film advancing direction (arrow x direction) by a predetermined amount by the feeder 225, the release film 40 is peeled off from the polarizing film 30 by the peeling section 210 and the polarized light is peeled off.
  • the film 30 travels on the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230, and reaches the position where the leading end 30a of the polarizing film 30 faces the attachment start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 (see FIG. 4C). .
  • the front end 30a of the polarizing film 30 in the traveling direction is not in contact with the affixing start end 10a of the glass substrate 10. There is.
  • the polarizing film 30 when the polarizing film 30 travels on the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230, the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230 is subjected to non-adhesive surface processing, so the polarizing film from which the release film 40 is peeled off When 30 travels on the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230, the polarizing film 30 can be smoothly advanced without the adhesive surface of the polarizing film 30 adhering to the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230.
  • the control on the feeder 225 by the control device 300 as described above is performed based on the photographed image data from the camera 250.
  • the control device 300 is a polarizing film 30 (first polarizing film) to be attached at this time based on shooting data from the camera 250
  • the position of the rear end 30b (cut C1) of 30) is monitored, and the feeder 225 is operated until the position of the rear end 30b (cut C1) reaches the target position.
  • the leading end 30 a of the polarizing film 30 reaches the bonding start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10.
  • the control device 300 controls the feeder 225 to release the clamp of the release film 40. By this, the feeder 225 returns to the initial position.
  • the dancer roll 222 moves downward by the amount of movement of the feeder 225.
  • the take-up operation of the release film 40 by the take-up roll (not shown) may be performed when the descent amount of the dancer roll 222 reaches a predetermined amount.
  • the dancer roll 222 functions not only at the time of the cueing operation of the polarizing film 30 by the feeder 225 but also at the time of the sticking operation of the polarizing film 30. That is, even during the attaching operation of the polarizing film 30, the operation of moving the table 100 and the winding operation of the release film by the winding roll do not need to be synchronized, and each operation may be performed independently. it can. For example, in the operation of attaching the polarizing film 30, the operation of winding the release film by the winding roll is performed after the operation of attaching the polarizing film 30 is completed and the clamper 221c releases the clamp of the release film 40. It may be performed at a predetermined timing.
  • FIG. 5A shows a state where the table 100 has been raised to the vertical direction reference position h from the position where the table 100 has been lowered (retracted).
  • the leading end 30a of the polarizing film 30 reaches the attachment start end 10a of the glass substrate 10.
  • Such lifting operation of the table 100 is performed by the control device 300.
  • the table elevating control function causes the table 100 to be temporarily lowered (retracted) below the vertical direction reference position h.
  • the feeder 225 is controlled to perform the feeding operation of the polarizing film 30 by the film member feeding control function.
  • the control device 300 controls the elevating mechanism so as to raise the table 100 to the vertical direction reference position h at a predetermined timing before the attachment operation of the polarizing film 30 starts by the table elevating control function.
  • the predetermined timing until the attachment operation of the polarizing film 30 starts is substantially the same timing as the timing when the indexing operation of the polarizing film 30 is finished or when the indexing operation of the polarizing film 30 is finished. It is preferable to do.
  • the pressing roll is performed.
  • the pressing roll 240 is moved (lowered) so as to press the leading end 30a of the polarizing film 30 against the bonding start end 10a of the glass substrate 10.
  • the presser roll 240 descends, and the pressing point P of the first presser roll 241 starts to attach the tip 30a of the polarizing film 30 to the glass substrate 10. It will be in the state pressed down to 10a (refer FIG.5 (b)).
  • the polarizing film 30 is positioned at the bonding start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10.
  • the second pressing roll 242 is in a state of pressing the first pressing roll 241.
  • the bonding operation of the polarizing film 30 is performed It will be. That is, as the table 100 moves in the direction of the arrow x '(left direction in the drawing) along the x axis from the state of FIG. 5B, the polarizing film 30 starts from the bonding start end 10a of the glass substrate 10. And it is pasted (see Figure 5 (c)).
  • the holding roll 240 holds the state in which the polarizing film 30 is held, when the table 100 moves in the direction of the arrow x ′ (the left direction in the drawing), the first holding roll 241 rotates clockwise. While rotating, the second pressing roll 242 presses the polarizing film 30 against the glass substrate 10 while rotating in the counterclockwise direction.
  • the attaching / peeling synchronization mechanism part 221 functions. That is, when the polarizing film 30 is attached, the release film 40 is clamped at a predetermined position between the dancer roll 222 as a tension applying unit and the peeling unit 210, and the clamped position and the peeling unit 210 Between the polarization film 30 and the polarization film 30, and the release film 40 is peeled off from the polarization film 30 (a peeling operation of the release film 40).
  • the polarizing film in this case, the polarizing film 30
  • the release film 40 is moved by the same movement amount as the movement amount of the table 100 as the table 100 moves. Advance in the folding direction, that is, the release film advancing direction (arrow x direction).
  • the attaching / releasing synchronization mechanism portion 221 clamps the position and the peeling portion 210 together.
  • the release film 40 is peeled off in active synchronization with the pasting operation of the first polarizing film 30.
  • the sticking / peeling synchronization mechanism unit 221 includes the first folding roll 221 a provided on the film member supply mechanism 200 side and the second folding roll 221 b provided on the table 100 side. And a clamper 221c.
  • the clamper 221 c clamps the release film 40 when the polarizing film 30 is attached. Therefore, when the table 100 is moved in the direction of the arrow x 'along the x-axis while the release film 40 is clamped by the clamper 221c when the polarizing film 30 is attached, the film member supply mechanism 200 The position of the first folding roll 221a attached to the side of the table 100 does not change, and the second folding roll 221b attached to the side of the table 100 moves along with the movement of the table 100. Thereby, the release film 40 is pulled by the second folding roll 221 b by the movement of the table 100 and advances in the release film advancing direction (arrow x direction).
  • the release film 40 is released from the tension by the dancer roll 222 as a tension applying unit.
  • the tension applied to the release film 40 is only the tension between the clamper 221c and the peeling portion 210.
  • the peeling operation of the release film 40 is performed in synchronization with the affixing operation of the polarizing film 30, The tension applied to the release film 40 is slight.
  • the release film 40 is released from the tension by the dancer roll 222, and the release film is released.
  • the 40 will not have much tension.
  • the tension added to the release film 40 can be made small, and, thereby, the release film 40 It is possible to suppress breakage of the release film 40 by rubbing at the folded back portion 211 of the peeling portion 210.
  • the folded portion 211 of the peeling portion 210 is also abraded away due to the friction with the release film. According to this, abrasion of the folded back portion 211 can also be suppressed.
  • the peeling operation peeling operation of the release film 40
  • the peeling operation of the release film 40 can be performed more reliably than in the case where the folded back portion 211 of the peeling portion 210 is, for example, a roll. That is, when the release film 40 is peeled off from the polarizing film 30 when the folded portion 211 is a roll, the polarizing film 30 is wound on the roll together with the release film 40, and a failure occurs such that the peeling operation can not be performed reliably. There is a case. At this time, if the diameter of the roll is large, occurrence of such a defect becomes more remarkable.
  • the return part 211 of the peeling part 210 is made into the corner part.
  • the above-mentioned problems can be eliminated, and a reliable peeling operation becomes possible.
  • the release film 40 is easily rubbed and the release film 40 is easily broken because the folded portion 211 of the peeling portion 210 is a corner portion.
  • the film member attaching apparatus 1 according to the embodiment Such a problem can be solved by providing the sticking / peeling synchronization mechanism portion 221 in the case of FIG. Further, the problem that the folded portion 211 is easily worn away by the release film 40 being rubbed by the folded portion 211 of the peeling portion 210 can also be solved.
  • the sticking / peeling synchronization mechanism part 221 does not function, but when performing the cueing of the polarizing film 30, it is necessary for performing the cueing operation of the polarizing film 30. Since only the release film 40 needs to be advanced, the amount of advancement of the release film 40 is small. For this reason, the load applied to the release film 40 can be reduced, and there is little possibility that the release film may be damaged or the folded portion 211 may be abraded away. In addition, since the release film 40 is clamped by the feeder 225 when the head of the polarizing film 30 is positioned, the tension by the tension applying portion (dancer roll 222) added to the release film 40 is also in this case. It has been released. This also makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the release film 40 when the polarizing film 30 is moved out.
  • the advancing amount of the release film 40 is large, and the release film is peeled off in a state where the leading end 30a of the polarizing film 30 is held by the pressing roll 240.
  • the load on 40 increases.
  • the size of the polarizing film 30 size along the moving direction
  • the advancing amount of the release film 40 increases, and the load applied to the releasing film 40 becomes larger.
  • the tension applied to the release film 40 can be reduced, and the load applied to the release film 40 can be reduced. Thereby, breakage of the release film 40 can be suppressed.
  • abrasion of the folded back portion 211 can be suppressed.
  • the table 100 returns to the initial position, but when the table 100 returns to the initial position, the clamp of the release film 40 by the clamper 221c Release Then, when the table 100 is further moved in the direction of the arrow x 'from the state shown in FIG. 5C, the table 100 returns to the position of FIG. 4A (the same position as the initial state). Thereby, the affixing process of the polarizing film 30 (the first polarizing film 30) to the glass substrate 10 (the first glass substrate 10) is completed, and subsequently, to the next glass substrate (referred to as the second glass substrate 10). A step of attaching a polarizing film (second polarizing film 30) is performed.
  • the first glass substrate 10 for which the step of attaching the first polarizing film 30 is finished is removed from the table 100, and The glass substrate 10 is placed, and the processes of FIG. 4A to FIG. 4C and FIG. 5A to FIG. 5C are performed. By repeating such a process, a polarizing film can be sequentially attached to each glass substrate.
  • the film member affixing device 1 when the affixing operation of the polarizing film 30 is performed, the affixing operation of the polarizing film 30 by the affixing / peeling synchronization mechanism portion 221 And the release film 40 is peeled off.
  • the tension applied to the release film 40 can be reduced, whereby the release film 40 is rubbed by the folded portion 211 of the peeling portion 210, Damage to the release film 40 can be suppressed.
  • abrasion of the folded portion 211 can be suppressed.
  • the folded back portion 211 of the peeling portion 210 is a corner portion, the peeling operation of the release film 40 can be reliably performed.
  • a guide member 230 for guiding the traveling of the polarizing film 30 is provided on the front side of the peeling portion 210. Since non-adhesive surface processing is applied to the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230, the adhesion surface of the polarizing film 30 can be prevented from adhering to the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230. It can be made to advance smoothly on the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230.
  • the guide member 230 can make the distance between the guide member tip end portion 232 and the attachment start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 as narrow as possible.
  • the level difference between the guide member tip end portion 232 and the adhesion start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 can be made as small as possible.
  • the distance until the leading end 30a of the polarizing film 30 reaches the attachment start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 can be shortened, and the self-weight is caused by the time the polarization film 30 reaches the attachment start end 10a. It can prevent that it bends. As a result, the leading end 30 a of the polarizing film 30 traveling on the guide surface 231 can be made to reach the bonding start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 with high accuracy.
  • the guide member 230 is installed so that the adhesion start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 is positioned on the extension of the guide surface 231, the tip end of the polarizing film 30 traveling on the guide surface 231 is also thereby 30a can be made to reach the bonding start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 with high accuracy.
  • the guide member 230 is formed of metal such as stainless steel, and the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230 is subjected to electroconductive and non-adhesive surface processing, and the guide surface 231 is electrically Is grounded (earthed). Therefore, even when static electricity is charged on the polarizing film 30, the static electricity charged on the polarizing film 30 can be removed.
  • the guide member 230 can be said to be a static electricity removing member.
  • the guide member 230 is the static electricity removing member, dust and dirt do not easily adhere to the polarizing film 30, and the polarizing film 30 is attached to the glass substrate 10 as the affixing member. At the time, the film member can be attached to the glass substrate 10 with high accuracy.
  • the glass substrate 10 to which the polarizing film 30 is attached is sent to the next process, it is possible to prevent the static electricity from being sent to the next process while being charged.
  • the table 100 when performing the indexing operation of the polarizing film 30, the table 100 is temporarily retracted below the reference position h in the vertical direction, and immediately after the indexing operation of the first polarizing film 30 is finished.
  • the table 100 is returned to the vertical direction reference position h at substantially the same timing as the timing at which the first polarizing film 30 ends the cueing operation. Thereby, it is possible to cue the polarizing film 30 with high accuracy.
  • the presser roll 240 is configured by a small diameter first presser roll 241 located on the side contacting the polarizing film 30, and a large diameter second presser roll 242 for backing up the pressing force of the first presser roll 241. ing.
  • the pressing roll 240 Since the pressing roll 240 has such a configuration, the first pressing roll 241 has a small diameter even if the distance between the guide member tip end portion 232 and the attachment start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 is narrow, the guide member The polarizing film 30 can be pressed without coming into contact with 230. Further, since the second pressing roll 242 also serves to prevent the warping of the first pressing roll 241, the polarizing film 30 can be applied with a uniform pressing force over the entire width direction (direction along the rotation axis of the pressing roll 240). We can hold down surely.
  • the diameter of the first pressing roll is about 10 mm
  • the diameter of the first pressing roll does not necessarily have to be about 10 mm
  • the guide member tip portion 232 and the glass substrate The diameter can be optimized according to the distance d to the pasting start end 10a 10 and the like.
  • the guide member 230 adopts a triangular block shape
  • the shape of the guide member 230 is not limited, and the release film 40 is peeled off.
  • the front end portion 30 a of the polarizing film 30 may be made to advance toward the bonding start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 placed on the table 100, and may be, for example, a plate shape.
  • FIG. 6 is a figure shown in order to demonstrate the case where the guide member 230 is made into plate shape. 6 corresponds to FIG. 3 (a), except that the guide member 230 is plate-shaped, and the other components are the same as those in FIG. The same symbol is attached. Even when the guide member 230 has a plate shape, it is preferable that the guide member distal end portion 232 has an edge as shown in FIG.
  • the leading end 30a of the polarizing film 30 can be made to reach the bonding start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 with high accuracy.
  • the guide member 230 has a plate shape, the guide surface 231 of the plate-like guide member 230 is subjected to non-adhesive surface processing having conductivity, and the guide surface 231 is electrically Is grounded. Thereby, the same countermeasure against static electricity as the guide member 230 used in the film member bonding apparatus 1 according to the embodiment can be achieved.
  • the guide member 230 may not be a plate having a thickness as shown in FIG. 6, and a thin plate member having a plate thickness of, for example, about 1 mm to several mm may be used. The member tip end portion 232 naturally becomes an edge.
  • the film member supply mechanism unit 200 when performing the attaching operation of the polarizing film 30 shown in FIG. 4, the film member supply mechanism unit 200 is fixed, and the case where the table 100 is reciprocated along the x axis is illustrated.
  • the table 100 may be fixed and the film member supply mechanism 200 may be reciprocated.
  • the position of the table 100 is fixed in a state where the glass substrate 10 is placed on the table 100 as in the initial state of FIG. 4A. Then, the film member supply mechanism unit 200 is moved in the direction of the arrow x 'in FIG. 4 (in the left direction in the figure), and the state is substantially the same as FIG. Perform the process of FIG. 5 (c). In this case, when the polarizing film 30 is attached, the film member supply mechanism 200 is moved in the arrow x direction with the table 100 fixed. Also by performing such an operation, it is possible to stick the polarizing film 30 to the glass substrate 10 as in the above embodiment.
  • the attaching operation of the polarizing film 30 may be performed by combining the operation of reciprocating the table 100 along the x-axis and the operation of reciprocating the film member supply mechanism 200 along the x-axis. Also by performing such an operation, it is possible to stick the polarizing film 30 to the glass substrate 10 as in the above embodiment. In this case, it is also possible to obtain an effect of speeding up the attaching operation.
  • the affixing / peeling synchronization mechanism 221 can function when performing the affixing operation of the polarizing film 30. .
  • the film member supply mechanism 200 moves in the direction of the arrow x.
  • the first folding roll 221a also moves along with the movement of the film member supply mechanism 200.
  • the position of the second folding roll 221b provided on the side of the table 100 does not change.
  • the release film 40 is pulled by the first folding roll 221a with the movement of the film member supply mechanism 200, and the polarizing film 30 advances while the release film 40 is peeled off from the polarizing film 30. Also in this case, in a state where the release film 40 is clamped by the clamper 221 cc, the release operation of the release film 40 is performed in active synchronization with the affixing operation of the polarizing film 30. When the film 40 is peeled off, the tension applied to the release film can be reduced.
  • the sticking / peeling synchronization mechanism is functioned be able to.
  • the position of the rear end 30b of the polarizing film 30 is monitored, and the position of the rear end 30b of the polarizing film 30 is behind the polarizing film 30.
  • the release film 40 may be controlled to advance in the release film advancing direction until the end 30 b moves by a target movement amount (referred to as a target movement amount).
  • a target movement amount referred to as a target movement amount
  • Such control is performed in advance by using as a target movement amount whether the front end 30a of the polarizing film 30 reaches the pressing point P of the first pressing roll 241 when the rear end 30b of the polarizing film 30 is moved from a predetermined position. It can be implemented by asking for it.
  • tip folding part was wedge shape (sharp angle) was illustrated in a peeling part, it is not limited to being wedge shape (sharp angle),
  • the corner may be substantially at a right angle.
  • the operation of lowering (retracting) the table 100 retracts the table 100 when it is moved to the position of FIG.
  • the table 100 may be moved to the position shown in FIG. 4 (b) with the table 100 lowered (retracted) at the stage of the initial state shown in FIG. 4 (a).
  • the glass substrate used for one of the two glass substrates used in the liquid crystal panel (the glass substrate provided on the front side of the liquid crystal layer and the glass substrate provided on the back side)
  • the case where the polarizing film is attached is described, the case where the polarizing film is attached to the glass substrate used on the other side can be substantially the same.
  • the film member is a polarizing film used for a liquid crystal panel
  • the affixing member is a glass substrate used for a liquid crystal panel
  • the polarizing film is attached to the glass substrate
  • the film member affixing device for this purpose has been described, the film member affixing device is not limited to the film member affixing device described in the above embodiment, and an apparatus for affixing the film member to the affixing member It is widely applicable.
  • the film member has a rectangular shape, but the shape of the film member is not limited to a rectangular shape, and may be a square, or may be a rectangle and a square (rectangle) is not.
  • first presser roll 241 and the second presser roll 242 have the first presser roll 241 having a smaller diameter than the second presser roll 242, the second presser roll 242 is used as a backup roll. As long as the function is possible, the first holding roll 241 and the second holding roll 242 may have the same diameter.
  • the pressure roller 240 has a configuration in which two pressure rollers are stacked in two stages.
  • the present invention is not limited to two, and three or more pressure rollers may be overlapped. It is good also as composition.
  • the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230 is electrically grounded via the guide member 230, the support member (not shown), and the stage 50.
  • a lead wire for grounding may be connected to the guide surface 231 or the guide member 230 to directly ground the guide member.
  • the film member may be a protective film used for a liquid crystal panel, or may be an electromagnetic wave shielding film used for an electronic device.
  • the to-be-adhered member was used as the glass substrate used for a liquid crystal panel, this invention is not limited to this.
  • it may be a synthetic resin substrate (including a synthetic resin film) used for a liquid crystal panel.
  • it may be a glass substrate or a synthetic resin substrate (including a synthetic resin film) used for other than the liquid crystal panel (for example, an organic EL panel or other display).
  • the electronic circuit board used for things other than a display may be used.
  • Toshikal (registered trademark) S coating processing As a process for applying conductive non-adhesive surface processing to the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230, a technology for surface processing called "Toshikal (registered trademark) S coating processing" To adopt such a coating process, Toshikal (registered trademark) S, UNA-300 series (UNA-310-X10), UNA-800 series, TS-1000 series, TS-1080 series, TS-1310 series Although it is possible to preferably use ones, the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the film thickness of the coating film of Toshikal (registered trademark) S is, for example, preferably 1 ⁇ m to 200 ⁇ m, and preferably 3 ⁇ m to 150 ⁇ m, but the present invention is not limited to this.
  • a concavo-convex structure may be formed on the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230.
  • the average surface roughness of the concavo-convex structure in this case is preferably 2 ⁇ m to 15 ⁇ m, but the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the affixing / peeling synchronization mechanism section 221 actively synchronizes with the affixing operation of the polarizing film 30 to perform the peeling operation of the release film
  • the affixing / peeling synchronization mechanism Although the clamper 221c is provided in the part 221 and the release film 40 is clamped by the clamper 221c, the clamper 226 of the feeder 225 is only used for the indexing operation of the polarizing film 30 without providing the clamper 221c. Instead, it is also possible to use for paste / peel synchronization operation in the paste / peel synchronization mechanism unit 221.
  • the release film 40 is clamped by the clamper 226 of the feeder 225 when performing the sticking / peeling synchronization operation. Even in this case, the release film 40 is released from the tension by the dancer roll 222 as a tension applying unit, and the tension applied to the release film 40 can be reduced.
  • SYMBOLS 1 Film member affixing apparatus, 10 ... Glass substrate (member to be affixed), 10a ... Affixing start end, 30 ... Polarization film (film member), 30a ... Tip part (progress Direction end portion), 30b ⁇ Rear end portion (advancing direction rear end portion), 31 ⁇ Adhesive, 40 ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ Release film, 50 ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ Stage, 60 ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ Guide rail, 100 ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ Table 110 Slider 120 Table body 200 Film member supply mechanism 210 Peeling portion 211 Folded portion 220 Release film advancing mechanism , 221: peeling / pasting synchronization mechanism, 221a: first folding roll, 221b: second folding roll, 221c: clamper, 222: dancer roll ( Position application portion, 225: feeder, 226: clamper (a clamper of feeder 225) 230: guide member 231: guide surface 232: guide member tip (tip of guide member) Part), 240:

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Textile Engineering (AREA)
  • Folding Of Thin Sheet-Like Materials, Special Discharging Devices, And Others (AREA)
  • Lining Or Joining Of Plastics Or The Like (AREA)
  • Polarising Elements (AREA)
  • Liquid Crystal (AREA)

Abstract

A film member attaching device 1 comprising a table 100 on which a member to attach is placed, a film member supply mechanism 200, and a control device 300 that has a film member feed control function and an attachment control function, wherein the film member supply mechanism 200 has a release film advancing mechanism 220 that advances a release film 40 returned by a peeling unit 210, and the release film advancing mechanism 220 has an attaching-peeling synchronization mechanism 221 that peels off the release film 40 by actively synchronizing to the action of attaching a film member (polarization film) 30 when performing an action to attach the film member 30. Damage to the release film can be prevented by reducing the tension applied to the release film when attaching the film member to the member to attach while returning and peeling, with the peeling unit, the release film from the film member to which the release film is separably attached.

Description

フィルム部材貼り付け装置及びフィルム部材貼り付け方法Film member attaching apparatus and film member attaching method
 本発明は、フィルム部材を被貼り付け部材に貼り付けるフィルム部材貼り付け装置及びフィルム部材貼り付け方法に関する。 BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION Field of the Invention The present invention relates to a film member bonding apparatus for bonding a film member to a member to be bonded, and a film member bonding method.
 リリースフィルムが剥離可能に貼付されているフィルム部材からリリースフィルムを剥がした後に、リリースフィルムが剥がされたフィルム部材を被貼り付け部材に貼り付けるフィルム部材貼り付け装置は種々提案されている(例えば、特許文献1参照。)。 After peeling a release film from a film member to which a release film is peelably attached, various film member affixing devices for affixing the film member from which the release film has been peeled to a member to be attached have been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1).
 図7は、特許文献1に記載されているフィルム部材貼り付け装置800の要部を取り出して示す図である。なお、特許文献1においては「プラスチックフィルム貼り合わせ装置」としているが、この明細書においては、「フィルム部材貼り付け装置」として説明する。 FIG. 7 is a view showing a main part of the film member affixing apparatus 800 described in Patent Document 1 by taking it out. In addition, although it is set as "a plastic film bonding apparatus" in patent document 1, it demonstrates as a "film member bonding apparatus" in this specification.
 特許文献1に記載されているフィルム部材貼り付け装置800には、図7に示すように、リリースフィルム810が剥離可能に貼付されているフィルム部材820からリリースフィルム810を剥がす剥がしユニット830が備えられている。当該剥がしユニット830には、剥がし部840が設けられており、当該剥がし部840の先端部には折り返し部841が形成されており、当該折り返し部841は角部(くさび状の角部)となっている。そして、リリースフィルム810は、剥がし部840の折り返し部841で折り返されたのちにロール850によって進行方向を変えて矢印x’方向に進行するように構成されている。 As shown in FIG. 7, the film member affixing apparatus 800 described in Patent Document 1 includes a peeling unit 830 for peeling the release film 810 from the film member 820 to which the release film 810 is peelably attached. ing. The peeling unit 830 is provided with a peeling portion 840, and a folded portion 841 is formed at the tip of the peeled portion 840, and the folded portion 841 becomes a corner (wedge shaped corner). ing. Then, after the release film 810 is folded back at the folded portion 841 of the peeling portion 840, the release film 810 is configured to change in the advancing direction by the roll 850 and advance in the arrow x 'direction.
 このような剥がしユニット830において、リリースフィルム810をフィルム部材820から剥がす際には、剥がしユニット830の上面において、フィルム部材820を吸着装置(図示せず。)によって吸着した状態として、剥がしユニット830を矢印x方向にスライドさせる。これにより、フィルム部材820からリリースフィルム810を剥がすことができる。 In such a peeling unit 830, when peeling the release film 810 from the film member 820, the peeling unit 830 is in a state where the film member 820 is adsorbed by an adsorption device (not shown) on the upper surface of the peeling unit 830. Slide in the arrow x direction. Thereby, the release film 810 can be peeled off from the film member 820.
 一方、吸着装置によって吸着されたフィルム部材820は、被貼り付け部材(図示せず。)の所定の貼り付け位置に移送されて当該貼り付け位置に貼り付けられる。 On the other hand, the film member 820 adsorbed by the adsorption device is transferred to a predetermined affixing position of the affixing member (not shown) and is affixed to the affixing position.
特開2011-251805号公報JP, 2011-251805, A
 特許文献1に記載されているフィルム部材貼り付け装置800においては、リリースフィルム810が剥離可能に貼付されているフィルム部材820からリリースフィルム810を剥がして、リリースフィルム810が剥がされたフィルム部材820を被貼り付け部材に貼り付けることができるが、フィルム部材820からリリースフィルム810を剥がすための剥がし部840においては改善すべき課題も残る。 In the film member bonding apparatus 800 described in Patent Document 1, the release film 810 is peeled off from the film member 820 to which the release film 810 is peelably attached, and the film member 820 from which the release film 810 is peeled off is Although it can be stuck to a to-be-adhered member, the subject which should be improved also in the peeling part 840 for peeling the release film 810 from the film member 820 remains.
 すなわち、特許文献1に記載されているフィルム部材貼り付け装置800に用いられている剥がし部840は、折り返し部841が角部となっていて、当該折り返し部841においてリリースフィルム810を折り返すようにしている。このようなフィルム部材貼り付け装置800においては、リリースフィルムには、ダンサーロールなどのテンション付与部により、当該リリースフィルムの長手方向に沿ってテンション(張力)が付与されており、テンションが付与されている状態でリリースフィルムを進行させることによってフィルム部材を剥がすことが一般的に行われている。このため、リリースフィルム810の材質によっては、折り返し部841による擦れによって、リリースフィルム810が破れたり、切れたりして、リリースフィルムが破損してしまうといった問題がある。リリースフィルム810が破損すると、フィルム部材の進行動作及びリリースフィルム40の剥がし動作に支障が生じてしまうことにもつながる。 That is, in the peeling portion 840 used in the film member affixing apparatus 800 described in Patent Document 1, the folded portion 841 is a corner, and the release film 810 is folded back at the folded portion 841. There is. In such a film member affixing apparatus 800, a tension is applied to the release film along the longitudinal direction of the release film by a tension application unit such as a dancer roll, and the tension is applied. It is a common practice to peel off the film member by advancing the release film in the closed state. For this reason, depending on the material of the release film 810, there is a problem that the release film 810 may be torn or broken due to the rubbing by the folded portion 841, and the release film may be broken. If the release film 810 is broken, it also leads to problems in the advancing operation of the film member and the peeling operation of the release film 40.
 また、特許文献1に記載されているフィルム部材貼り付け装置800に用いられている剥がし部840に類似した剥がし部を有する他のフィルム部材貼り付け装置においても、同様の問題が生じる。 Moreover, the same problem arises also in the other film member affixing apparatus which has the peeling part similar to the peeling part 840 used for the film member affixing apparatus 800 described in patent document 1.
 図8は、従来の他のフィルム部材貼り付け装置900の一例を説明するために示す図である。以下、特許文献1に記載されているフィルム部材貼り付け装置800(図7参照)を「従来の第1フィルム部材貼り付け装置800」とし、図8に示す他のフィルム部材貼り付け装置900を「従来の第2フィルム部材貼り付け装置900」とする。なお、図8は従来の第2フィルム部材貼り付け装置900に用いられている剥がし部を簡略化して模式的に示している。 FIG. 8 is a figure shown in order to demonstrate an example of the other conventional film member affixing apparatus 900. As shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the film member affixing device 800 (refer to FIG. 7) described in Patent Document 1 is referred to as “the conventional first film member affixing device 800”, and the other film member affixing device 900 shown in FIG. It is referred to as a conventional second film member bonding apparatus 900 ". FIG. 8 schematically and schematically shows the peeling portion used in the conventional second film member bonding apparatus 900. As shown in FIG.
 図8に示すように、従来の第2フィルム部材貼り付け装置900においても、リリースフィルム910が剥離可能に添付されているフィルム部材920からリリースフィルム910を剥がす剥がし部930が備えられている。当該剥がし部930においても、折り返し部931が角部(くさび状の角部)となっており、リリースフィルム910を折り返し部931で折り返したのちに、当該リリースフィルム910を矢印x方向に進行させることによって、リリースフィルム910が剥離可能に添付されているフィルム部材920からリリースフィルム910を剥がす。 As shown in FIG. 8, also in the conventional second film member bonding apparatus 900, a peeling section 930 is provided for peeling the release film 910 from the film member 920 to which the release film 910 is peelably attached. Also in the peeling portion 930, the folded portion 931 is a corner (wedge shaped corner), and after the release film 910 is folded at the folded portion 931, the release film 910 is advanced in the arrow x direction. Thus, the release film 910 is peeled off from the film member 920 to which the release film 910 is peelably attached.
 但し、従来の第2フィルム部材貼り付け装置900においては、リリースフィルム910を剥がす際には、フィルム部材920を吸着装置によって吸着する構成ではなく、リリースフィルム910を剥がしながらフィルム部材920をわずかに進行させて、当該フィルム部材920の進行方向先端部920a(先端部920aと略記する場合もある。)を被貼り付け部材940の貼り付け始端940aに到達させた後に、当該フィルム部材920の先端部920aを押さえロール950などで押さえ付けて、テーブル960をガイドレール970に沿って矢印x’方向に移動させるとともに、折り返し部931で折り返されたリリースフィルムを矢印x方向に引っ張って行く。これにより、フィルム部材920は、被貼り付け部材940に貼り付けられて行く。 However, in the conventional second film member bonding apparatus 900, when the release film 910 is peeled off, the film member 920 is not adsorbed by the suction device, but the film member 920 is slightly advanced while the release film 910 is peeled off. And the tip end 920a of the film member 920 (sometimes abbreviated as the tip end 920a) reaches the sticking start end 940a of the affixing member 940, and then the tip end 920a of the film member 920 And the table 960 is moved along the guide rails 970 in the direction of arrow x ′, and the release film folded back at the folding portion 931 is pulled in the direction of arrow x. Thus, the film member 920 is attached to the affixing member 940.
 従来の第2フィルム部材貼り付け装置900においても、従来の第1フィルム部材貼り付け装置800と同様に、リリースフィルム910をくさび状の折り返し部931で折り返しているとともに、当該リリースフィルムにはテンションが付与されているため、リリースフィルム910の材質によっては、折り返し部841による擦れによって、リリースフィルム910が破れたり、切れたりして、リリースフィルムが破損してしまうといった問題がある。 Also in the conventional second film member affixing apparatus 900, as in the conventional first film member affixing apparatus 800, the release film 910 is folded back by the wedge-shaped folded portion 931, and tension is applied to the release film. Since it is applied, depending on the material of the release film 910, there is a problem that the release film 910 may be torn or broken due to the rubbing by the folded portion 841, and the release film may be broken.
 このような問題を解消するには、折り返し部931を角部とするのではなく、図8における破線枠C内に示すように、折り返し部931を、丸みを有する折り返し部931aとすることも考えられるが、従来の第2フィルム部材貼り付け装置900においては、折り返し部と被貼り付け部材940の貼り付け始端940aとの関係が重要なものとなる。 In order to solve such a problem, it is also considered to set the folded portion 931 as a rounded portion 931a having a roundness, as shown in a broken line frame C in FIG. However, in the conventional second film member affixing apparatus 900, the relationship between the folded back portion and the affixing start end 940a of the affixing member 940 is important.
 その理由は、従来の第2フィルム部材貼り付け装置900においては、折り返し部931によってリリースフィルム910が剥がされたフィルム部材920の先端部920aを、被貼り付け部材に到達させる際の到達位置の精度は、高い精度が要求されるからである。 The reason is that, in the conventional second film member affixing apparatus 900, the accuracy of the reaching position when the leading end 920a of the film member 920 from which the release film 910 is peeled off by the folded portion 931 reaches the affixing member The reason is that high accuracy is required.
 すなわち、従来の第2フィルム部材貼り付け装置900においては、剥がし部930の折り返し部931でリリースフィルム910が剥がされたフィルム部材920は、剥がし部930の傾斜面932の延長上を進んで、当該フィルム部材920の先端部920aが被貼り付け部材940の貼り付け始端940aに到達した後に、当該フィルム部材920の先端部920aを押さえロール950などにより押さえ付けた状態で、テーブル960をガイドレール970に沿って矢印x’方向に移動させるとともに、折り返し部931で折り返されたリリースフィルム910を矢印x方向に進行させて行くといった動作を行うためである。 That is, in the conventional second film member affixing apparatus 900, the film member 920 from which the release film 910 is peeled off at the folded portion 931 of the peeling portion 930 proceeds on the extension of the inclined surface 932 of the peeling portion 930. After the leading end 920a of the film member 920 reaches the sticking start end 940a of the affixing member 940, the table 960 is attached to the guide rail 970 in a state where the leading end 920a of the film member 920 is pressed by the pressing roll 950 or the like. This is to move the release film 910 folded back at the folding portion 931 in the direction of the arrow x ′ while moving the release film 910 in the direction of the arrow x ′.
 このため、フィルム部材920の先端部920aを被貼り付け部材940に到達させる際の到達位置の精度が低いと、フィルム部材920が被貼り付け部材940の正しい位置に貼り付けられないこととなる。具体的には、例えば、図8における破線枠C内に示すように、折り返し部931を、丸みを有する折り返し部931aとすると、当該折り返し部931aでリリースフィルムが剥がされたフィルム部材920は、剥がし部930の傾斜面932の延長上を進む際に、フィルム部材920の先端部920aが被貼り付け部材940の貼り付け始端940aに到達するまでの距離が長くなり、貼り付け始端940aに到達するまでの間において、自重によって撓んでしまう場合もある。このため、フィルム部材920の先端部920aが被貼り付け部材940の貼り付け始端940aに高い精度で到達できずに、フィルム部材920を被貼り付け部材940に正確に貼り付けできないといった問題が生じる。丸みの径を大きくすると、このような傾向はより顕著なものとなる。 For this reason, if the accuracy of the reaching position when the tip end portion 920a of the film member 920 reaches the affixing member 940 is low, the film member 920 can not be stuck at the correct position of the affixing member 940. Specifically, for example, as shown in a broken line frame C in FIG. 8, when the folded portion 931 is a folded portion 931a having a roundness, the film member 920 from which the release film is peeled off at the folded portion 931a is peeled off. When advancing on the extension of the inclined surface 932 of the portion 930, the distance until the leading end 920a of the film member 920 reaches the sticking start end 940a of the affixing member 940 becomes long and reaches the sticking start end 940a In the meantime, it may be bent by its own weight. Therefore, the leading end 920 a of the film member 920 can not reach the attachment start end 940 a of the affixing member 940 with high accuracy, and the film member 920 can not be accurately attached to the affixing member 940. Such a tendency becomes more pronounced as the radius of the rounding is increased.
 このような問題、すなわち、フィルム部材920の先端部920aが被貼り付け部材940の貼り付け始端940aに高い精度で到達できずに、フィルム部材920を被貼り付け部材940に正確に貼り付けできないといった問題は、折り返し部931を、丸みを有する折り返し部931aとする場合だけでなく、例えば、折り返し部931をロール(図示せず。)とした場合にも同様に発生する。 Such a problem, that is, the tip end 920a of the film member 920 can not reach the attachment start end 940a of the affixing member 940 with high accuracy, and the film member 920 can not be accurately attached to the affixing member 940 The problem occurs not only in the case where the folded portion 931 is formed as the rounded portion 931a but also in the case where, for example, the folded portion 931 is formed as a roll (not shown).
 すなわち、折り返し部931をロールとした場合であっても、丸みを有する折り返し部931aとした場合と同様に、リリースフィルム910が剥がされたフィルム部材920は、剥がし部930の傾斜面932の延長上を進む際に、被貼り付け部材940の貼り付け始端940aに到達するまでの距離が長くなるため、フィルム部材920の先端部920aが被貼り付け部材940の貼り付け始端940aに高い精度で到達できないといった問題が生じることとなる。このため、折り返し部は角部(特にくさび状の角部)とすることが好ましいが、折り返し部をくさび状の角部とすると、上記したようにリリースフィルムが破損し易くなるといった問題が生じる。 That is, even in the case where the folded portion 931 is a roll, the film member 920 from which the release film 910 is peeled off extends the inclined surface 932 of the peeled portion 930 as in the case of forming the rounded portion 931a. Of the film member 920 can not reach the attachment start end 940a of the attachment member 940 with high accuracy because the distance until the attachment start end 940a of the attachment member 940 is reached becomes long. Problems will arise. For this reason, it is preferable to form the folded portion as a corner portion (particularly, a wedge shaped corner portion). However, when the folded portion is a wedge shaped corner portion, there arises a problem that the release film is easily broken as described above.
 なお、リリースフィルムが破損し易くなる問題は、剥がし部の折り返し部が、くさび状などの角部となっていることによって生じるだけではなく、折り返し部が多少の丸みを有していても、長期間の使用などによって生じる可能性はある。このため、このような問題は、リリースフィルムを剥がし部の折り返し部で折り返すことによってリリースフィルムを剥がしながらフィルム部材を被貼り付け部材に貼り付けて行くフィルム部材貼り付け装置においては共通して存在する。 In addition, the problem that the release film is easily broken is not only caused by the folded-back portion of the peeling-off portion being a corner such as a wedge shape, but also long even if the folded-back portion has some roundness. There is a possibility that it may occur due to the use of a term. For this reason, such a problem is commonly present in a film member affixing device which affixes the film member to the affixing member while peeling off the release film by folding back the release film at the folding portion of the peeling portion. .
 本発明は上記事情に鑑みてなされたものであり、リリースフィルムを剥がし部の折り返し部で折り返すことによってリリースフィルムを剥がしながらフィルム部材を被貼り付け部材に貼り付けて行く際に、リリースフィルムに加わるテンション(張力)を小さくすることにより、リリースフィルムの破損を抑制することができるフィルム部材貼り付け装置及びフィルム部材貼り付け方法を提供することを目的とする。 The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and is added to the release film when the film member is attached to the affixing member while peeling off the release film by folding back the release film at the folded back portion of the peeling portion. An object of the present invention is to provide a film member attaching apparatus and a film member attaching method which can suppress breakage of a release film by reducing tension (tension).
 [1]本発明のフィルム部材貼り付け装置は、一方の面が接着面となっており、当該接着面にリリースフィルムが剥離可能に貼付されているフィルム部材から前記リリースフィルムを剥がしながら前記フィルム部材を進行させて行き、前記リリースフィルムが剥がされた前記フィルム部材の進行方向先端部を、被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端に到達させるための「フィルム部材の頭出し動作」を行った後に、前記フィルム部材の進行方向先端部を前記被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端に押さえ付けた状態で前記貼り付け始端を起点に前記リリースフィルムを剥がしながら前記フィルム部材を前記被貼り付け部材に貼り付けて行く「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」を行うフィルム部材貼り付け装置であって、前記被貼り付け部材を載置するテーブルと、前記フィルム部材を供給するフィルム部材供給機構部と、前記「フィルム部材の頭出し動作」を行うために前記フィルム部材供給機構部を制御するフィルム部材頭出し制御機能と、前記「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」を行うために前記フィルム部材供給機構部及び前記テーブルの少なくとも一方を相対的に移動させる貼り付け制御機能とを有する制御装置と、を備え、前記フィルム部材供給機構部は、前記リリースフィルムを前記フィルム部材の進行方向とはほぼ反対方向に折り返す折り返し部を有し、当該折り返し部で前記リリースフィルムを折り返した状態で前記フィルム部材供給機構部及び前記テーブルの少なくとも一方が相対的に移動することによって前記フィルム部材から前記リリースフィルムを剥がす剥がし部と、前記折り返し部で折り返された前記リリースフィルムを進行させるリリースフィルム進行機構部と、を有し、前記リリースフィルム進行機構部には、前記折り返された前記リリースフィルムに対して前記リリースフィルムが進行する方向に沿ったテンションを付与するテンション付与部と、当該テンション付与部と前記剥がし部との間に配置され、前記「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」を行う際においては、前記リリースフィルムを前記テンション付与部と前記剥がし部との間の所定位置でクランプし、当該クランプした位置と前記剥がし部との間で、前記「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」に能動的に同期させて前記フィルム部材から前記リリースフィルムを剥がす動作を行う貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部と、が設けられていることを特徴とする。 [1] The film member affixing device of the present invention is one in which one surface is an adhesive surface, and the film member is peeled off the release film from the film member on which the release film is peelably attached. After the “film member indexing operation” for causing the leading end of the film member in the traveling direction from which the release film has been peeled to reach the attachment start end of the member to be attached, The film member is attached to the affixing member while peeling off the release film starting from the affixing start end with the forward direction end of the film member pressed against the affixing start end of the affixing member It is a film member affixing device which performs "the affixing operation of a film member", and a tape for mounting the affixing member A film member supply mechanism for supplying the film member, a film member indexing control function for controlling the film member supply mechanism to perform the "film member indexing operation", and A control device having an adhesion control function to move at least one of the film member supply mechanism and the table relatively to perform the adhesion operation of the film member; A release film is folded back in a direction substantially opposite to the traveling direction of the film member, and at least one of the film member supply mechanism and the table is relatively in a state in which the release film is folded at the folded portion. A peeling section for peeling the release film from the film member by moving; And a release film advancing mechanism section for advancing the release film folded back at the folding portion, and the release film advancing mechanism section moves in a direction in which the release film advances with respect to the release film folded back. The release film is disposed between a tension applying unit for applying tension along the length and the tension applying unit and the peeling unit, and the release film is used as the tension applying unit and the tension applying unit. The release film is clamped from the film member in active synchronization with the "pasting operation of the film member" by clamping at a predetermined position between the peeling portion and between the clamped position and the peeling portion. A sticking / peeling synchronization mechanism unit for performing peeling operation is provided. .
 このように、本発明においては、リリースフィルム進行機構部には、「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」を行う際においては、リリースフィルムをテンション付与部と剥がし部との間の所定位置でクランプし、当該クランプした位置と剥がし部との間で、「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」に能動的に同期させてフィルム部材からリリースフィルムを剥がす動作を行う貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部が設けられている。このため、フィルム部材の貼り付け動作を行う際においては、「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」に同期してフィルム部材からリリースフィルムを剥がす動作を行わせることができる。 As described above, in the present invention, the release film is clamped at a predetermined position between the tension applying portion and the peeling portion in the release film advancing mechanism portion at the time of performing the operation of attaching the film member. Between the clamped position and the peeling portion, a sticking / peeling synchronization mechanism portion is provided which performs an operation of peeling the release film from the film member in active synchronization with “the sticking operation of the film member”. For this reason, when performing the affixing operation of the film member, it is possible to perform an operation of peeling the release film from the film member in synchronization with the “affixing operation of the film member”.
 具体的には、「フィルム部材貼り付け動作」を行う際においては、リリースフィルムがクランプされた状態となっているため、リリースフィルムは、テンション付与部によるテンションから解放された状態となり、リリースフィルムに加わるテンションはクランパーと剥がし部との間のテンションのみとなる。そして、この状態で、フィルム部材の貼り付け動作に同期してフィルム部材からリリースフィルムを剥がす動作が行われるため、リリースフィルムに加わるテンションはわずかなものとなる。このため、テンション付与部によってリリースフィルムに大きなテンションンが加わっているような構成であったとしても、リリースフィルムは、テンション付与部によるテンションから解放された状態となり、リリースフィルムにはそれほど大きなテンションは加わらないこととなる。 Specifically, when performing the "film member pasting operation", since the release film is in a clamped state, the release film is released from the tension by the tension applying portion, and the release film is released. The tension applied is only the tension between the clamper and the peeling portion. Then, in this state, since the release film is peeled off from the film member in synchronization with the attaching operation of the film member, the tension applied to the release film becomes small. For this reason, even if a large tension is added to the release film by the tension applying section, the release film is released from the tension by the tension applying section, and the tension of the release film is so large. It will not join.
 これにより、本発明のフィルム部材貼り付け装置によれば、フィルム部材の貼り付け動作を行う際においては、リリースフィルムに加わるテンションを小さくすることができる。これによって、リリースフィルムが剥がし部の折り返し部で擦れてしまうことにより、リリースフィルムが破損してしまうことを抑制できる。また、フィルム部材貼り付け装置を長期間使用すると、リリースフィルムとの間の摩擦によって剥がし部の折り返し部も擦り減ってしまうといった問題もあるが、本発明のフィルム部材貼り付け装置によれば、折り返し部の擦り減りをも抑制できる。 Thereby, according to the film member affixing device of the present invention, when performing the film affixing operation, the tension applied to the release film can be reduced. As a result, the release film can be suppressed from being damaged due to the release film being rubbed at the folded back portion of the peeling portion. In addition, there is also a problem that when the film member affixing device is used for a long time, the folded portion of the peeling portion is also abraded away due to the friction with the release film, but according to the film member affixing device of the present invention It is also possible to suppress abrasion of the part.
 なお、「能動的に同期させて」の「能動的に」というのは、例えば、「積極的に」にといった意味を有している。従って、「能動的に同期させて前記フィルム部材から前記リリースフィルムを剥がす動作を行う」というのは、例えば、「積極的に同期させて前記フィルム部材から前記リリースフィルムを剥がす動作を行う」と言い換えることもできる。 Note that "actively" in "actively synchronized" means, for example, "actively". Therefore, the phrase "actively synchronizes and performs the action of peeling the release film from the film member" means, for example, "actively performs the action of synchronously peeling the release film from the film member" It can also be done.
 [2]本発明のフィルム部材貼り付け装置においては、前記貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部は、前記テンション付与部と前記剥がし部との間の所定位置に設けられ、前記リリースフィルムを前記テンション付与部と前記剥がし部との間の所定位置でクランプするクランパーと、前記クランパーと前記剥がし部との間に位置し、かつ、前記フィルム部材供給機構部の側に取り付けられており、前記剥がし部で剥がされたリリースフィルムを前記フィルム部材の進行方向とほぼ同方向に進行させるように折り返す第1折り返しロールと、前記クランパーと前記第1折り返しロールとの間に位置し、かつ、前記テーブルの側に取り付けられており、前記第1折り返しロールで折り返されたリリースフィルムを前記フィルム部材の進行方向とほぼ反対方向に進行させるように折り返す第2折り返しロールと、を有することが好ましい。 [2] In the film member affixing device of the present invention, the affixing / peeling synchronization mechanism portion is provided at a predetermined position between the tension applying portion and the peeling portion, and the release film is subjected to the tension applying portion. A clamper which clamps at a predetermined position between the sheet and the peeling portion, and a position between the clamper and the peeling portion and attached to the film member supply mechanism side, and peeling at the peeling portion A first folding roll that folds the released film forward so as to advance in substantially the same direction as the advancing direction of the film member, and is disposed between the clamper and the first folding roll and attached to the side of the table The release film folded back by the first folding roll is substantially opposite to the traveling direction of the film member It is preferred to have the, second folding roll folding so as to proceed.
 貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部がこのような構成となっていることにより、フィルム部材の貼り付け動作を行う際においては、クランパーでクランプした位置と剥がし部との間で、「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」に能動的に同期させてフィルム部材からリリースフィルムを剥がす動作を行わせることができる。 When the sticking / peeling synchronization mechanism portion has such a configuration, when performing the sticking operation of the film member, “sticking the film member between the position clamped by the clamper and the peeling portion. Actively synchronized to "action", an action can be performed to strip the release film from the film member.
 [3]本発明のフィルム部材貼り付け装置においては、前記テーブルには、当該テーブルを上下方向に昇降させるための昇降機構が設けられており、前記「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」を行う際の前記テーブルの上下方向の位置を上下方向基準位置としたとき、前記制御装置は、前記「フィルム部材の頭出し動作」を行う際においては、前記テーブルを前記上下方向基準位置よりも下方向に一時的に下降させるように前記昇降機構を制御して、前記フィルム部材頭出し制御機能によって前記「フィルム部材の頭出し動作」を行い、前記フィルム部材の貼り付け動作が開始するまでの所定のタイミングで前記テーブルを前記上下方向基準位置にまで上昇させるように前記昇降機構を制御するテーブル昇降制御機能をさらに有することが好ましい。 [3] In the film member affixing device of the present invention, the table is provided with a lift mechanism for moving the table up and down, and the film member affixing operation is performed. When the vertical direction position of the table is the vertical direction reference position, the control device temporarily performs the table below the vertical direction reference position when the film member performs the cueing operation of the film member. Control the elevating mechanism so as to cause the film member to move downward and perform the "film member indexing operation" by the film member indexing control function at a predetermined timing until the film member attaching operation is started. It is preferable to further have a table elevation control function to control the elevation mechanism so as to raise the table to the vertical reference position. There.
 このように、フィルム部材の頭出し動作を行う際においては、テーブルを上下方向基準位置よりも下方向に一時的に下降(退避)させた状態としてフィルム部材の頭出し動作を行い、フィルム部材の貼り付け動作が開始するまでの所定のタイミングでテーブルを上下方向基準位置にまで上昇(復帰)させるように昇降機構を制御する。このような制御を行うことによって、フィルム部材を高い精度で頭出しすることができ、それによって、フィルム部材の進行方向先端部を、被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端に高精度に到達させることができる。 As described above, when performing the film member indexing operation, the film member is moved downward (retracted) temporarily below the reference position in the vertical direction to perform the film member indexing operation. The elevating mechanism is controlled to raise (return) the table to the reference position in the vertical direction at a predetermined timing before the paste operation starts. By performing such control, it is possible to cue the film member with high accuracy, and thereby the tip end in the traveling direction of the film member can be made to reach the attachment start end of the affixing member with high accuracy. it can.
 すなわち、リリースフィルムが剥がされたフィルム部材には接着剤が塗布されているため、テーブルが上下方向基準位置にある状態でフィルム部材の頭出し動作を行うと、接着剤が被貼り付け部材に付着してフィルム部材の進行が妨げられてしまい、フィルム部材の進行方向先端部を、被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端に高精度に到達させることができないといった不具合が生じる可能性がある。このような不具合を防止するために、フィルム部材の頭出し動作を行う際においては、テーブルを上下方向基準位置よりも下方向に一時的に下降(退避)させた状態とする。なお、フィルム部材の貼り付け動作が開始するまでの所定のタイミングとしては、フィルム部材の頭出し動作が終了した直後又はフィルム部材の頭出し動作が終了するのとほぼ同じタイミングとすることが好ましい。 That is, since the adhesive is applied to the film member from which the release film has been peeled off, the adhesive adheres to the affixing member when the film member performs the cueing operation while the table is in the vertical direction reference position. As a result, the movement of the film member is impeded, and there may occur a problem that the leading end of the film member in the movement direction can not reach the adhesion start end of the member to be adhered with high accuracy. In order to prevent such a problem, the table is temporarily lowered (retracted) below the reference position in the vertical direction when performing the indexing operation for the film member. It is preferable that the predetermined timing before the film member sticking operation starts is substantially the same timing as the end of the film member cueing operation or the same as the end of the film member cueing operation.
 [4]本発明のフィルム部材貼り付け装置においては、前記剥がし部の前記折り返し部は角部となっていることが好ましい。 [4] In the film member bonding apparatus of the present invention, it is preferable that the folded portion of the peeling portion be a corner.
 このように、剥がし部の折り返し部が角部となっていることにより、フィルム部材からリリースフィルムを剥がすときの剥がし動作を確実に行うことができる。なお、剥がし部の折り返し部が角部となっている場合には、リリースフィルムは、より破損しやすくなるとともに、剥がし部の折り返し部も擦り減りやすくなるが、剥がし部の折り返し部が角部となっている場合であっても、リリースフィルムに加わるテンションを小さくすることによって、リリースフィルムの破損を抑制できる。また、リリースフィルムが剥がし部の折り返し部で擦れることによる折り返し部の擦り減りをも抑制できる。なお、角部というのは、例えば、くさび状の角部を例示できる。 As described above, since the folded back portion of the peeling portion is a corner portion, the peeling operation can be reliably performed when peeling the release film from the film member. In addition, when the folded-back portion of the peeling portion is a corner, the release film is more easily damaged and the folded-back portion of the peeling portion is also easily worn away, but the folded-back portion of the peeling portion is a corner and Even in the case where it is the case, breakage of the release film can be suppressed by reducing the tension applied to the release film. In addition, it is possible to suppress abrasion of the folded back portion caused by rubbing of the release film at the folded back portion of the peeling portion. The corner may be, for example, a wedge-shaped corner.
 [5]本発明のフィルム部材貼り付け装置においては、前記クランパーと前記テンション付与部との間には、前記「フィルム部材の頭出し動作」を行わせるためのフィーダーが設けられていることが好ましい。 [5] In the film member affixing device of the present invention, it is preferable that a feeder for performing the “film member indexing operation” is provided between the clamper and the tension applying portion. .
 このようなフィーダーが設けられていることにより、リリースフィルムが剥がされたフィルム部材の頭出し動作を行うことができる。それによって、フィルム部材の進行方向先端部を被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端に到達させることができる。 By providing such a feeder, it is possible to perform a cueing operation of the film member from which the release film has been peeled off. Thus, the forward end of the film member in the traveling direction can be made to reach the attachment start end of the affixing member.
 [6]本発明のフィルム部材貼り付け装置においては、前記フィルム部材供給機構部は、前記フィルム部材の所定部分を撮像可能に設置されたカメラをさらに有し、前記制御装置は、前記カメラからの撮影データに基づいて前記フィルム部材の前記所定部分の位置を監視して、前記「フィルム部材の頭出し動作」を行うように前記フィーダーを制御するフィーダー制御機能をさらに有することが好ましい。 [6] In the film member affixing device of the present invention, the film member supply mechanism further includes a camera installed so as to be able to pick up an image of a predetermined portion of the film member, and the control device is It is preferable to further have a feeder control function of monitoring the position of the predetermined portion of the film member based on shooting data and controlling the feeder to perform the "heading operation of the film member".
 これにより、フィルム部材の頭出し動作を高い精度で行うことができる。それによって、フィルム部材の進行方向先端部を被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端に高い精度で到達させることができる。 As a result, the cueing operation of the film member can be performed with high accuracy. Thus, the leading end of the film member in the traveling direction can be made to reach the attachment start end of the affixing member with high accuracy.
 [7]本発明のフィルム部材貼り付け装置においては、前記フィルム部材の所定部分は、当該フィルム部材の進行方向後端部であることが好ましい。 [7] In the film member affixing device of the present invention, it is preferable that the predetermined part of the film member is a rear end portion in the traveling direction of the film member.
 このように、カメラをフィルム部材(現時点において貼り付け対象となっているフィルム部材)の進行方向後端部を撮像可能に設置することにより、カメラを設置するためのスペースに余裕を持たせることができる。これは、現時点において貼り付け対象となっているフィルム部材の進行方向先端部を撮影しようとすると、当該フィルム部材の進行方向先端部の付近は、押さえロールなどが存在するために、カメラを設置するためのスペースに余裕がないためである。 As described above, by providing the camera so that the rear end of the film member (the film member to be attached at this time) in the traveling direction can be imaged, it is possible to provide a space for installing the camera. it can. This is because when the leading end of the film member which is to be attached at this time is to be photographed, the camera is installed in the vicinity of the leading end of the film member in the advancing direction since the pressing roll and the like exist. This is because there is no room for space.
 [8]本発明のフィルム部材貼り付け装置においては、前記フィルム部材供給機構部は、前記剥がし部によってリリースフィルムが剥がされた前記フィルム部材の進行をガイドするガイド面が存在し当該ガイド面には接着剤の付着を防ぐ非粘着性表面加工が施されているガイド部材をさらに有し、前記ガイド部材は、当該ガイド部材の先端部がエッジとなっているとともに、前記ガイド面が前記被貼り付け部材に対して鋭角をなし、かつ、当該ガイド面の延長上に前記被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端が位置するように設置されていることが好ましい。 [8] In the film member affixing device of the present invention, the film member supply mechanism portion has a guide surface for guiding the progress of the film member from which the release film has been peeled by the peeling portion, and the guide surface The guide member further has a non-adhesive surface treatment for preventing adhesion of an adhesive, and the guide member has an edge at the tip end of the guide member, and the guide surface is the adherable member. It is preferable that an acute angle is formed with respect to the member, and the attachment start end of the member to be attached is positioned on the extension of the guide surface.
 このように、剥がし部の前方側には、フィルム部材の進行をガイドするガイド部材が設けられている。そして、当該ガイド部材のガイド面には、非粘着性表面加工が施されているため、フィルム部材の接着面がガイド部材のガイド面に付着してしまうことを防止でき、フィルム部材をガイド部材のガイド面でスムーズに進行させることができる。 Thus, on the front side of the peeling portion, a guide member for guiding the progress of the film member is provided. Since the non-adhesive surface processing is applied to the guide surface of the guide member, the adhesive surface of the film member can be prevented from adhering to the guide surface of the guide member, and the film member It can be made to progress smoothly on the guide surface.
 また、ガイド部材は、当該ガイド部材の先端部がエッジとなっているとともに、ガイド面が被貼り付け部材に対して鋭角をなし、かつ、当該ガイド面の延長上に被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端が位置するように設置されているため、当該ガイド部材の先端部と被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端との間隔を可能な限り狭くすることができるとともに、ガイド部材の先端部と被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端との間の段差を可能な限り小さくできる。これにより、フィルム部材の進行方向先端部が被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端に到達するまでの距離を短くすることができ、フィルム部材が貼り付け始端に到達するまでの間において、自重によって撓んでしまうといったことを防止できる。それによって、ガイド面を進行するフィルム部材の進行方向先端部を被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端に高い精度で到達させることができる。 Further, in the guide member, the tip end portion of the guide member is an edge, the guide surface forms an acute angle with the affixing member, and the affixing member is pasted on the extension of the guide surface Since the start end is positioned, the distance between the end of the guide member and the attachment start end of the affixing member can be made as narrow as possible, and the end of the guide member and the affixing The difference in level between the attachment start end of the member and the end can be made as small as possible. This makes it possible to shorten the distance until the leading end of the film member in the traveling direction reaches the sticking start end of the affixing member, and the film member is bent by its own weight until it reaches the sticking start end. It is possible to prevent such a situation. As a result, the leading end of the film member in the traveling direction traveling on the guide surface can be made to reach the sticking start end of the member to be stuck with high accuracy.
 また、ガイド部材は、当該ガイド面の延長上に被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端が位置するように設置されているため、これによっても、ガイド面を進行するフィルム部材の進行方向先端部を被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端に高い精度で到達させることができる。なお、「ガイド部材の先端部がエッジとなっている」というのは、例えば、先端部が鋭角をなしていてもよく、また、先端部が薄板状となっていてもよいことを意味している。 Further, since the guide member is installed so that the attachment start end of the affixing member is positioned on the extension of the guide surface, the tip end portion of the film member advancing in the guide surface is also covered by this It can be made to reach the pasting end of the pasting member with high accuracy. Note that “the tip of the guide member is an edge” means, for example, that the tip may have an acute angle, and that the tip may be thin. There is.
 [9]本発明のフィルム部材貼り付け装置においては、前記ガイド面は、導電性を有するとともに電気的に接地されていることが好ましい。 [9] In the film member bonding apparatus of the present invention, the guide surface is preferably electrically conductive and electrically grounded.
 このように、ガイド面は、導電性をも有するとともに電気的に接地されているため、フィルム部材に静電気が帯電した場合であっても、当該フィルム部材に帯電した静電気を除去できる。これにより、フィルム部材に埃やゴミなどが付着しにくくなるとともに、フィルム部材を被貼り付け部材に貼り付ける動作を行う際に、高い精度でフィルム部材を被貼り付け部材に貼り付けることができる。また、フィルム部材が貼り付けられた被貼り付け部材を次の工程に送る際に、静電気が帯電したままの状態で次の工程に送られてしまうことを防ぐことができる。 As described above, since the guide surface also has conductivity and is electrically grounded, even if static electricity is charged on the film member, static electricity on the film member can be removed. As a result, dust and dirt do not easily adhere to the film member, and the film member can be attached with high precision to the affixing member when the film member is attached to the affixing member. Moreover, when sending the to-be-adhered member to which the film member is attached to the next step, it is possible to prevent the static electricity from being sent to the next step while being charged.
 特に、フィルム部材の接着面(接着材が塗布されている面)に静電気が帯電した場合でも、フィルム部材の接着面が導電性を有するガイド面に接触することによって、接着面に帯電した静電気を確実に除去できる。これにより、フィルム部材が貼り付けられた被貼り付け部材を次の工程に送る際に、被貼り付け部材とフィルム部材との間に静電気が帯電したままの状態で次の工程に送られてしまうことを防ぐことができる。被貼り付け部材とフィルム部材との間に静電気が帯電すると、容易には、静電気を除去することができない。このため、フィルム部材の接着面が導電性を有するガイド面に接触するだけで、接着面に帯電した静電気を確実に除去できることは、静電気対策として極めて有効なものとなる。 In particular, even when static electricity is charged on the adhesive surface of the film member (surface on which the adhesive is applied), the electrostatic surface of the film member contacts the conductive guide surface, whereby the static electricity on the adhesive surface is It can be removed reliably. As a result, when the affixing member to which the film member is attached is sent to the next step, the electrostatic charge is sent between the affixing member and the film member while being charged to the next step. You can prevent that. If static electricity is charged between the adherend member and the film member, the static electricity can not be easily removed. For this reason, it is extremely effective as a countermeasure against static electricity that the static electricity charged on the adhesive surface can be reliably removed only by contacting the adhesive surface of the film member with the conductive guide surface.
 [10]本発明のフィルム部材貼り付け装置においては、前記フィルム部材供給機構部は、前記フィルム部材の進行方向先端部を前記被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端に押さえるための押さえロールをさらに有し、前記押さえロールは、複数個の押さえロールが複数段に重ねられた構成となっていて、当該複数個の押さえロールのそれぞれの回転軸が、前記フィルム部材の進行方向先端部の辺に沿う方向となるように設置されていることが好ましい。 [10] In the film member affixing device of the present invention, the film member supply mechanism further includes a pressing roll for pressing the forward end of the film member in the forward direction of the affixing member. The pressing roll has a configuration in which a plurality of pressing rolls are stacked in a plurality of stages, and a rotation axis of each of the plurality of pressing rolls is along the side of the leading end of the film member. It is preferable to be installed so that
 フィルム部材の進行方向先端部を被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端に押さえ付ける押さえロールを有するため、フィルム部材を確実に被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端に位置決めすることができる。また、押さえロールがこのような構成となっていることにより、フィルム部材の進行方向先端部を当該進行方向先端部の辺に沿って確実に押さえ付けることができる。特に、フィルム部材の幅方向の長さ(押さえロールの回転軸に沿った長さ)が長い場合には、フィルム部材の進行方向先端部を幅方向全体に渡って均一な押圧力で押さえ付けることができ、フィルム部材の進行方向先端部を確実に押さえ付けることができる。 Since the pressing roll for pressing the forward end of the film member in the forward direction of the film member to the affixing start end of the affixing member is provided, the film member can be reliably positioned at the affixing start end of the affixing member. In addition, with such a configuration of the pressing roll, it is possible to reliably press the advancing direction leading end of the film member along the side of the advancing direction leading end. In particular, when the length in the width direction of the film member (length along the rotation axis of the pressing roll) is long, the leading end of the film member in the advancing direction is pressed with a uniform pressing force over the entire width direction. It is possible to securely press the leading end of the film member in the moving direction.
 [11]本発明のフィルム部材貼り付け装置においては、前記複数個の押さえロールのうち、前記フィルム部材に接触する側に位置する押さえロールの径は、他の押さえロールの径よりも小径に設定されていることが好ましい。 [11] In the film member affixing device of the present invention, among the plurality of pressing rolls, the diameter of the pressing roll positioned on the side in contact with the film member is set smaller than the diameter of the other pressing rolls. Is preferred.
 フィルム部材に接触する側に位置する押さえロールの径がこのように設定されていることにより、ガイド部材の先端部と被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端との間隔が狭くても、当該押さえロールが小径であることからガイド部材に接触することなく、フィルム部材の進行方向先端部を確実に押さえ付けることができる。また、小径となっている押さえロールの反りを防ぐこともできることから、フィルム部材の進行方向先端部を当該フィルム部材の幅方向全体に渡って均一な押圧力で押さえ付けることができる。 By setting the diameter of the pressing roll positioned on the side in contact with the film member in this way, even if the distance between the leading end of the guide member and the sticking start end of the affixing member is narrow, the pressing roll Since the diameter is small, it is possible to reliably press the leading end of the film member in the traveling direction without contacting the guide member. In addition, since the warp of the holding roll having a small diameter can be prevented, the leading end of the film member in the traveling direction can be held down with a uniform pressing force over the entire width direction of the film member.
 [12]本発明のフィルム部材貼り付け装置においては、前記テンション付与部は、ダンサーロールであることが好ましい。 [12] In the film member affixing device of the present invention, the tension applying portion is preferably a dancer roll.
 前記テンション付与部がダンサーロールであることにより、リリースフィルムに対してテンション付与を行えることができるとともにフィルム部材の頭出し時及びフィルム部材の貼り付け動作時のそれぞれにおいて、フィルム部材の頭出し動作又はフィルム部材貼り付け動作と、巻き取りロールによるリリースフィルムの巻き取り動作とは同期をとる必要はなく、それぞれの動作を独立して行うことができる。 Since the tension applying unit is a dancer roll, it is possible to apply a tension to the release film, and at the time of indexing of the film member and at the time of attaching operation of the film member, indexing operation of the film member or The film member attaching operation and the winding operation of the release film by the winding roll do not have to be synchronized, and each operation can be performed independently.
 [13]本発明のフィルム部材貼り付け装置においては、前記フィルム部材は、長尺シート状をなし、当該長尺シート状のフィルム部材の長手方向に沿って所定長さごとに前記リリースフィルムを残して切れ目が設けられており、前記剥がし部によってリリースフィルムが剥がされることにより、個片化されたフィルム部材となり、当該個片化されたフィルム部材が前記被貼り付け部材に貼り付けられることが好ましい。 [13] In the film member affixing device of the present invention, the film member is in the form of a long sheet, and the release film is left for each predetermined length along the longitudinal direction of the long sheet film member. It is preferable that a slit is provided, and the release film is peeled off by the peeling portion to form a singulated film member, and the singulated film member is attached to the affixing member .
 フィルム部材がこのような構成となっていることにより、個々の被貼り付け部材にフィルム部材を貼り付ける動作を連続的に行うことができる。 With such a configuration of the film member, it is possible to continuously perform the operation of attaching the film member to the individual members to be attached.
 [14]本発明のフィルム部材貼り付け装置においては、前記フィルム部材は、液晶パネルに用いられる偏光フィルム若しくは保護フィルム又は電子機器に用いられる電磁波シールドフィルムであり、前記被貼り付け部材は、前記液晶パネルに用いられるガラス基板若しくは合成樹脂基板又は電子機器に用いられる電子回路基板である、ことが好ましい。 [14] In the film member affixing device of the present invention, the film member is a polarizing film or a protective film used for a liquid crystal panel or an electromagnetic wave shielding film used for an electronic device, and the affixing member is the liquid crystal It is preferable that it is a glass substrate or a synthetic resin substrate used for a panel or an electronic circuit substrate used for an electronic device.
 本態様のフィルム部材貼り付け装置によれば、液晶パネルに用いられる偏光フィルム又は保護フィルムを液晶パネルに用いられるガラス基板又は合成樹脂基板に精度よく貼り付けたり、電子機器に用いられる電磁波シールドフィルムを電子機器に用いられる電子回路基板に精度よく貼り付けたりすることができるため、高品質な液晶パネルや電子機器を製造することができる。 According to the film member affixing device of this aspect, the polarizing film or the protective film used for the liquid crystal panel can be precisely attached to the glass substrate or the synthetic resin substrate used for the liquid crystal panel, or the electromagnetic wave shielding film used for the electronic device Since the liquid crystal panel can be precisely attached to an electronic circuit substrate used in an electronic device, a high-quality liquid crystal panel or an electronic device can be manufactured.
 [15]本発明のフィルム部材貼り付け方法は、一方の面が接着面となっており、当該接着面にリリースフィルムが剥離可能に貼付されているフィルム部材から前記リリースフィルムを剥がしながら前記フィルム部材を進行させて行き、前記リリースフィルムが剥がされた前記フィルム部材の進行方向先端部を、被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端に到達させるための「フィルム部材の頭出し動作」を行った後に、前記フィルム部材の進行方向先端部を前記被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端に押さえ付けた状態で前記貼り付け始端を起点に前記リリースフィルムを剥がしながら前記フィルム部材を前記被貼り付け部材に貼り付けて行く「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」をフィルム部材貼り付け装置が行うフィルム部材貼り付け方法であって、前記フィルム部材貼り付け装置は、前記被貼り付け部材を載置するテーブルと、前記フィルム部材を供給するフィルム部材供給機構部と、前記「フィルム部材の頭出し動作」を行うために前記フィルム部材供給機構部を制御するフィルム部材頭出し制御機能と、前記「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」を行うために前記フィルム部材供給機構部及び前記テーブルの少なくとも一方を相対的に移動させる貼り付け制御機能とを有する制御装置と、を備え、前記フィルム部材供給機構部は、前記リリースフィルムを前記フィルム部材の進行方向とはほぼ反対方向に折り返す折り返し部を有し、当該折り返し部でリリースフィルムを折り返した状態で前記フィルム部材供給機構部及び前記テーブルの少なくとも一方が相対的に移動することによって前記フィルム部材からリリースフィルムを剥がす剥がし部と、前記折り返し部で折り返された前記リリースフィルムを進行させるリリースフィルム進行機構部と、を有し、前記リリースフィルム進行機構部には、前記折り返された前記リリースフィルムに対して前記リリースフィルムが進行する方向に沿ったテンションを付与するテンション付与部と、当該テンション付与部と前記剥がし部との間に配置され、前記「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」を行う際においては、前記リリースフィルムを前記テンション付与部と前記剥がし部との間の所定位置でクランプし、当該クランプした位置と前記剥がし部との間で、前記「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」に能動的に同期させて前記フィルム部材から前記リリースフィルムを剥がす動作を行う貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部と、が設けられており、前記「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」を行う際においては、前記リリースフィルムを前記テンション付与部と前記剥がし部との間の所定位置でクランプし、当該クランプした位置と前記剥がし部との間で、前記「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」に能動的に同期させて前記フィルム部材から前記リリースフィルムを剥がす動作を行うことを特徴とする。 [15] The film member affixing method of the present invention is such that the film member has one surface as an adhesive surface and the release film is peeled off from the film member on which the release film is peelably attached. After the “film member indexing operation” for causing the leading end of the film member in the traveling direction from which the release film has been peeled to reach the attachment start end of the member to be attached, The film member is attached to the affixing member while peeling off the release film starting from the affixing start end with the forward direction end of the film member pressed against the affixing start end of the affixing member It is a film member affixing method which a film member affixing device performs "the affixing operation of a film member", and the film The lum member affixing device includes a table on which the affixing member is placed, a film member supply mechanism for supplying the film member, and the film member supply mechanism for performing the "film member indexing operation". It has a film member indexing control function that controls the unit, and an adhesion control function that relatively moves at least one of the film member supply mechanism and the table to perform the "film member adhesion operation". A control device, the film member supply mechanism portion has a folded portion that folds the release film back in a direction substantially opposite to the traveling direction of the film member, and the release film is folded at the folded portion; The film is relatively moved by relatively moving at least one of the film member supply mechanism and the table. A release film for removing the release film from the film member, and a release film advancing mechanism for advancing the release film folded back at the folded portion, and the release film advancing mechanism comprises the released release folded back When it is disposed between a tension applying unit that applies a tension along the direction in which the release film advances to the film, and the tension applying unit and the peeling unit, and the “film member sticking operation” is performed In the above, the release film is clamped at a predetermined position between the tension applying portion and the peeling portion, and the "film member sticking operation" is actively performed between the clamped position and the peeling portion. Perform the action of removing the release film from the film member in synchronization with And a synchronization mechanism unit, and when the "film member sticking operation" is performed, the release film is clamped at a predetermined position between the tension applying unit and the peeling unit, The release film is peeled off from the film member in active synchronization with the “pasting operation of the film member” between the clamped position and the peeling portion.
 本発明のフィルム部材貼り付け方法によれば、前記[1]に記載の本発明のフィルム部材貼り付け装置と同様の効果が得られる。また、本発明のフィルム部材貼り付け方法においても、前記[2]~[14]に記載の本発明のフィルム部材貼り付け装置と同様の特徴を有することが好ましい。 According to the film member affixing method of the present invention, the same effect as the film member affixing device of the present invention described in the above [1] can be obtained. In the film member affixing method of the present invention, it is preferable to have the same characteristics as the film member affixing device of the present invention described in the above [2] to [14].
実施形態1に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1を説明するために示す図である。It is a figure shown in order to demonstrate the film member affixing apparatus 1 which concerns on Embodiment 1. FIG. 偏光フィルム30(リリースフィルム40が貼付されている状態の偏光フィルム30)を説明するために示す図である。It is a figure shown in order to demonstrate the polarizing film 30 (the polarizing film 30 in the state to which the release film 40 is stuck). ガイド部材230及び押さえロール240を説明するために示す図である。It is a figure shown in order to demonstrate the guide member 230 and the pressing roll 240. FIG. 実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1の動作を説明するために示す図である。It is a figure shown in order to explain operation of film member pasting device 1 concerning an embodiment. 実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1動作(図4の続きの動作)を説明するために示す図である。It is a figure shown in order to demonstrate the film member affixing device 1 operation | movement (operation | movement of the continuation of FIG. 4) which concerns on embodiment. ガイド部材230を板状とした場合を説明するために示す図である。It is a figure shown in order to demonstrate the case where the guide member 230 is made into plate shape. 特許文献1に記載されているフィルム部材貼り付け装置800の要部を取り出して示す図である。It is a figure which takes out and shows the principal part of the film member affixing device 800 described in patent document 1. FIG. 従来の他のフィルム部材貼り付け装置900の一例を説明するために示す図である。It is a figure shown in order to demonstrate an example of the conventional other film member affixing apparatus 900. FIG.
 以下、本発明の実施形態について説明する。実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1は、接着面にリリースフィルムが剥離可能に貼付されているフィルム部材からリリースフィルムを剥がしながらフィルム部材を進行させて行き、リリースフィルムが剥がされたフィルム部材の進行方向先端部を、被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端に到達させるための「フィルム部材の頭出し動作」を行った後に、フィルム部材の進行方向先端部を被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端に押さえた状態で貼り付け始端を起点にリリースフィルムを剥がしながらフィルム部材を被貼り付け部材に貼り付けて行く「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」を行うフィルム部材貼り付け装置である。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described. The film member affixing device 1 according to the embodiment advances the film member while peeling off the release film from the film member to which the release film is peelably attached to the adhesive surface, and the release film is peeled off After performing the "heading operation of the film member" for causing the forward end of the advancing direction to reach the attaching start end of the affixing member, the advancing end of the advancing direction of the film member is pressed against the affixing beginning of the adherend It is a film member affixing device which performs "film member affixing operation" which affixes a film member to a member to be affixed while peeling off a release film starting from an affixing start end.
 なお、フィルム部材は、被貼り付け部材のフィルム部材貼り付け面における貼り付け始端を起点に当該フィルム部材貼り付け面に貼り付けられて行くものであるが、この明細書においては、「フィルム部材貼り付け面」を省略して、例えば、「フィルム部材は、被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端を起点に貼り付けられて行く」と表記したり、単に「フィルム部材は、被貼り付け部材に貼り付けられて行く」と表記したりする。 In addition, although a film member is stuck on the said film member affixing surface on the basis of the sticking starting end in the film member affixing surface of a member to be stuck, in this specification, "a film member affixing is carried out For example, it is described as "the film member is stuck starting from the sticking start end of the member to be stuck," or simply "the film member is stuck to the member to be paste" It is written that it will be
 また、実施形態1に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1においては、フィルム部材は、液晶パネルに用いられる偏光フィルムであるとし、また、被貼り付け部材は、液晶パネルに用いられるガラス基板であるとする。ここで、フィルム部材(偏光フィルム)のサイズは特に限定されるものではないが、実施形態1に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1においては、被貼り付け部材(ガラス基板)が、例えば、長辺(縦)1500mm×短辺(横)900mm程度の比較的大きいサイズであるとし、このようなサイズを有する被貼り付け部材の横方向の辺及び縦方向の辺からそれぞれ5mm程度の余白を有して貼り付けることができるサイズ(例えば、長辺(縦)1490mm×短辺(横)890mm程度)を有するものであるとする。 Moreover, in the film member affixing device 1 according to the first embodiment, the film member is a polarizing film used for a liquid crystal panel, and the affixing member is a glass substrate used for a liquid crystal panel . Here, the size of the film member (polarizing film) is not particularly limited. However, in the film member bonding apparatus 1 according to the first embodiment, the member to be bonded (glass substrate) has, for example, a long side Vertical) A relatively large size of 1500 mm × short side (horizontal) of about 900 mm, with a margin of about 5 mm from the side in the lateral direction and the side in the longitudinal direction of the member to be attached having such a size It is assumed to have a size that can be attached (for example, a long side (longitudinal) 1490 mm × short side (lateral) about 890 mm).
 液晶パネルは、一般的には、液晶層の表側及び裏側に設けられる2枚のガラス基板(表側のガラス基板及び裏側のガラス基板)に、偏光方向が直交する偏光フィルムを貼付した構成となっているが、実施形態1に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1においては、表側のガラス基板及び裏側のガラス基板のうちの一方の面に用いるガラス基板に偏光フィルムを貼付する場合について説明する。以下、実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1について詳細に説明する。 In general, a liquid crystal panel has a configuration in which polarizing films having polarization directions orthogonal to each other are attached to two glass substrates (a glass substrate on the front side and a glass substrate on the back side) provided on the front side and the back side of a liquid crystal layer. However, in the film member bonding apparatus 1 according to the first embodiment, a case where a polarizing film is bonded to a glass substrate used for one of the front side glass substrate and the rear side glass substrate will be described. Hereinafter, the film member bonding apparatus 1 which concerns on embodiment is demonstrated in detail.
 なお、以下の説明においては、「フィルム部材」を「偏光フィルム」と表記する場合もあり、「被貼り付け部材」を「ガラス基板」と表記する場合もある。このため、以下の説明において「偏光フィルム」と表記されている場合には、当該偏光フィルムは「フィルム部材」を指すものであり、「ガラス基板」と表記されている場合には、当該ガラス基板は「被貼り付け部材」を指すものである。 In the following description, "film member" may be described as "polarizing film", and "member to be adhered" may be described as "glass substrate". For this reason, in the following description, when it is described as "a polarizing film", the said polarizing film points out a "film member", and when it is described as a "glass substrate", the said glass substrate Indicates a "member to be adhered".
 図1は、実施形態1に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1を説明するために示す図である。なお、図1は実施形態1に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1を模式的に示す図である。実施形態1に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1は、図1に示すように、ガラス基板10を載置するテーブル100と、偏光フィルム30(フィルム部材)を供給するフィルム部材供給機構部200と、実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1の各構成要素を制御するための制御機能を有する制御装置300と、備えている。なお、これらテーブル100、フィルム部材供給機構部200の詳細な構成及び動作については後述する。また、制御装置300が有する制御機能についても後述する。 FIG. 1 is a figure shown in order to demonstrate the film member affixing apparatus 1 based on Embodiment 1. FIG. In addition, FIG. 1 is a figure which shows the film member affixing apparatus 1 concerning Embodiment 1 typically. The film member affixing device 1 according to the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, is a table 100 on which the glass substrate 10 is placed, a film member supply mechanism 200 for supplying a polarizing film 30 (film member), and It has the control apparatus 300 which has a control function for controlling each component of the film member affixing device 1 which concerns on a form. The detailed configurations and operations of the table 100 and the film member supply mechanism unit 200 will be described later. Moreover, the control function which the control apparatus 300 has is also mentioned later.
 また、実施形態1に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1においては、フィルム部材供給機構部200を固定として、テーブル100を移動(x軸に沿ってx-x’方向に移動)させることにより、偏光フィルム30をガラス基板10に貼り付ける動作を行うものとして説明する。 Moreover, in the film member affixing device 1 according to the first embodiment, the polarizing film is moved by moving the table 100 (moving in the xx ′ direction along the x axis) with the film member supply mechanism 200 fixed. It is assumed that the operation of attaching 30 to the glass substrate 10 is performed.
 フィルム部材供給機構部200は、リリースフィルム40を偏光フィルム30の進行方向とはほぼ反対方向に折り返す折り返し部211を有する剥がし部210と、剥がし部210の折り返し部211で折り返されたリリースフィルム40をリリースフィルム進行方向に進行させるリリースフィルム進行機構部220とを有している。なお、「リリースフィルム進行方向」というのは、剥がし部210で折り返されたリリースフィルム40が進行する方向(矢印x方向)方向である。また、折り返し部211は、角部となっており、当該角部は、先端にわずかな丸みを有していてもよい。 The film member supply mechanism unit 200 has the peeling portion 210 having a folded portion 211 that folds the release film 40 in the direction substantially opposite to the traveling direction of the polarizing film 30, and the release film 40 folded at the folded portion 211 of the peeling portion 210. And a release film advancing mechanism 220 for advancing in the release film advancing direction. The “release film advancing direction” is a direction (arrow x direction) in which the release film 40 folded back at the peeling section 210 advances. In addition, the folded back portion 211 may be a corner, and the corner may have a slight roundness at the tip.
 剥がし部210は、折り返し部211によってリリースフィルム40を偏光フィルム30が進行する方向とはほぼ反対方向に折り返した状態で、この場合、テーブル100が移動することによって、偏光フィルム30からリリースフィルム40を剥がすように動作する。 In the peeling part 210, in a state where the release film 40 is folded in a direction substantially opposite to the direction in which the polarizing film 30 advances by the folding part 211, in this case, the release film 40 is removed from the polarizing film 30 by moving the table 100. Acts to peel off.
 また、フィルム部材供給機構部200は、剥がし部210によってリリースフィルム40が剥がされた偏光フィルム30の進行をガイドするガイド面231が存在するガイド部材230と、偏光フィルム30の進行方向先端部30a(以下、先端部30aと略記する場合もある。)が、ガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに到達すると、当該貼り付け始端10aにおいて当該偏光フィルム30の先端部30aを貼り付け始端10aに押さえ付ける押さえロール240と、偏光フィルム30の所定部分(後述する。)を撮像可能に設置されたカメラ250と、を有している。 In addition, the film member supply mechanism unit 200 includes a guide member 230 having a guide surface 231 for guiding the progress of the polarizing film 30 from which the release film 40 is peeled off by the peeling unit 210, and a tip 30a of the polarizing film 30 in the traveling direction. Hereinafter, when the leading end 30a may be abbreviated, it may be pressed when the leading end 30a of the polarizing film 30 is attached to the pasting end 10a when the leading end 10a of the glass substrate 10 is reached. It has the roll 240 and the camera 250 installed so as to be able to image a predetermined portion (described later) of the polarizing film 30.
 また、フィルム部材供給機構部200には、上記した構成要素の他に、偏光フィルム30(リリースフィルム40が貼付されている状態の偏光フィルム30)を屈曲させて進行させる進行補助ロール261,262が設けられている。また、偏光フィルム30(リリースフィルム40が貼付されている状態の偏光フィルム30)を送り出す送り出し機構部及び進行路の中途部に設けられているダンサーロールなども存在するが、これらの図示は省略する。 Further, in the film member supply mechanism portion 200, in addition to the above-described components, there are advancing auxiliary rolls 261 and 262 for causing the polarizing film 30 (the polarizing film 30 with the release film 40 attached thereto) to bend and advance. It is provided. There are also a delivery mechanism section for delivering the polarizing film 30 (the polarizing film 30 in the state where the release film 40 is attached) and a dancer roll provided in the middle of the traveling path, but these are not shown. .
 ところで、図1においては、偏光フィルム30は、ガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに到達した状態(頭出しされている状態)となっているとともに、テーブル100は、ガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aを起点に偏光フィルム30を貼り付ける動作を行う位置に移動した状態となった場合を示している。 By the way, in FIG. 1, the polarizing film 30 is in a state of reaching the attachment start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 (in a state of being pointed out), and the table 100 is the attachment start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10. The case where it has moved to the position which performs the operation | movement which affixes the polarizing film 30 from the starting point is shown.
 なお、実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1を説明する際においては、リリースフィルム40が剥がされた偏光フィルム30の進行方向先端部30aを、ガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに到達させるための動作を「偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作」と表記する場合もある。また、当該偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作を行った後に、偏光フィルム30の進行方向先端部30aをガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに押さえた状態で貼り付け始端10aを起点にリリースフィルム40を剥がしながら偏光フィルム30をガラス基板10貼り付けて行く動作を「偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作」と表記する場合もある。 When the film member affixing device 1 according to the embodiment is described, the front end portion 30 a of the polarizing film 30 from which the release film 40 is peeled is made to reach the affixing start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10. The operation may be referred to as "the polarizing film 30 cueing operation". In addition, after performing the cueing operation of the polarizing film 30, the release film 40 is peeled off with the sticking start end 10a as a starting point in a state where the leading end 30a of the polarizing film 30 in the advancing direction is pressed against the sticking start end 10a of the glass substrate 10. However, the operation of attaching the polarizing film 30 to the glass substrate 10 may be referred to as “the attaching operation of the polarizing film 30”.
 また、図1においては、押さえロール240は、当該偏光フィルム30の先端部30aから離脱した位置となっている場合が示されているが、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作を行う際には、当該押さえロール240は、偏光フィルム30の先端部30aを押さえた状態となる。そして、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作を行う際のテーブルの100のz軸に沿った上下方向位置を「上下方向基準位置」とする。当該上下方向基準位置は、ステージ50の表面からの高さhとして示されている。このため、以下、上下方向基準位置を「上下方向基準位置h」と表記する。 Moreover, in FIG. 1, the case where the holding | pressing roll 240 becomes a position which detached | left from the front-end | tip part 30a of the said polarizing film 30 is shown, but when performing the affixing operation of the polarizing film 30, the said The holding roll 240 holds the leading end 30 a of the polarizing film 30. Then, the position in the vertical direction along the z-axis of the table 100 at the time of performing the attaching operation of the polarizing film 30 is taken as the “vertical direction reference position”. The vertical reference position is shown as the height h from the surface of the stage 50. Therefore, the vertical direction reference position is hereinafter referred to as "vertical direction reference position h".
 また、図1においては、偏光フィルム30(リリースフィルム40が貼付されている状態の偏光フィルム30)は、進行補助ロール261によって、大きな角度で下方向に屈曲したのちに、進行補助ロール262によってxy平面に対して所定角度(実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1においては30度とする。)となるように屈曲して剥がし部210に到達する。なお、当該角度は30度に限定されるものではなく、適宜、最適な角度に設定可能である。 Further, in FIG. 1, the polarizing film 30 (the polarizing film 30 in a state where the release film 40 is attached) is bent downward at a large angle by the advancing auxiliary roll 261, and then xy by the advancing auxiliary roll 262. It bends so that it may become a predetermined angle (in the film member pasting device 1 concerning an embodiment, it makes 30 degrees) to a plane, and it reaches the exfoliation part 210. In addition, the said angle is not limited to 30 degree | times, It can set to an optimal angle suitably.
 このように、偏光フィルム30(リリースフィルム40が貼付されている状態の偏光フィルム30)は、当該偏光フィルム30の進行路上において、進行補助ロール261,262などにより、進行方向が下方向に屈曲したり斜め方向となったりするが、当該偏光フィルム30の進行方向は、全体的には、x軸に沿って図示の右から左に向かう方向(矢印x’方向)であるとする。このため、この明細書においては、偏光フィルム30の進行方向について述べる場合には、「x軸に沿った矢印x’方向」又は「図示の右から左方向」というように表記する。 As described above, the polarization film 30 (the polarization film 30 in the state where the release film 40 is attached) is bent downward in the traveling direction by the traveling auxiliary rolls 261 and 262 on the traveling path of the polarizing film 30. The traveling direction of the polarizing film 30 is generally taken as a direction (arrow x 'direction) from the right to the left in the drawing along the x-axis. Therefore, in the present specification, when the traveling direction of the polarizing film 30 is described, it is described as "arrow x 'direction along x axis" or "right to left direction in the drawing".
 なお、図1における破線枠A内は、偏光フィルム30(リリースフィルム40が貼付されている状態の偏光フィルム30)の拡大断面図である。当該偏光フィルム30(リリースフィルム40が貼付されている状態の偏光フィルム30)の構成については図2により説明する。 In addition, the inside of the broken line frame A in FIG. 1 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the polarizing film 30 (the polarizing film 30 in a state where the release film 40 is attached). The configuration of the polarizing film 30 (the polarizing film 30 in a state where the release film 40 is attached) will be described with reference to FIG.
 図2は、偏光フィルム30(リリースフィルム40が貼付されている状態の偏光フィルム30)を説明するために示す図である。図2において、図2(a)は平面図であり、図2(b)は側断面図である。なお、図2は模式的に示す図であり、厚みなどが誇張されて描かれている。 FIG. 2 is a figure shown in order to demonstrate the polarizing film 30 (The polarizing film 30 in the state to which the release film 40 is stuck). In FIG. 2, FIG. 2 (a) is a plan view, and FIG. 2 (b) is a side sectional view. In addition, FIG. 2 is a figure which shows typically and thickness etc. are exaggerated and drawn.
 偏光フィルム30には、図2に示すように、長尺状となっており、長尺のリリースフィルム40が剥離可能に貼付されている。当該偏光フィルム30は、貼り付け対象となる個々のガラス基板10(図1参照。)に対応したサイズに個片化できるように、リリースフィルム40を残して所定の長さごとに切れ目が設けられている。例えば、ガラス基板10の長辺(1500mmとする。)がx軸に沿うようにテーブル100上に載置される場合においては、偏光フィルム30の長辺(1490mmとする。)ごとに、リリースフィルム40を残して切れ目C1,C2,・・・が設けられている。 As shown in FIG. 2, the polarizing film 30 has a long shape, and a long release film 40 is peelably attached. The polarizing film 30 is cut at predetermined lengths leaving the release film 40 so that the polarizing film 30 can be singulated to the size corresponding to the individual glass substrate 10 (see FIG. 1) to be attached. ing. For example, in the case where the long side of the glass substrate 10 (1500 mm) is placed on the table 100 along the x-axis, a release film is provided for each long side (1490 mm) of the polarizing film 30. Cuts C1, C2, ... are provided leaving 40.
 また、偏光フィルム30には接着剤31が塗布されているため、偏光フィルム30からリリースフィルム40を剥がすと、偏光フィルム30の一方の面(下面とする。)には、接着剤31が露出することとなる。なお、偏光フィルム30において接着剤31が塗布されている側の面を「接着面」という。 Further, since the adhesive 31 is applied to the polarizing film 30, when the release film 40 is peeled off from the polarizing film 30, the adhesive 31 is exposed on one surface (referred to as the lower surface) of the polarizing film 30. It will be. Note that the surface of the polarizing film 30 on which the adhesive 31 is applied is referred to as an “adhesion surface”.
 なお、図2に示す長尺状の偏光フィルム30において、個々のガラス基板に対応した偏光フィルムを個々に説明する場合には、個々の偏光フィルムを、図2における左側から順に、第1偏光フィルム30、第2偏光フィルム30、・・・というように説明する。なお、切れ目C1,C2,・・・は、個々の偏光フィルム30においては進行方向後端部(以下、後端部と略記する。)となる場合もあり、また、先端部となる場合もある。例えば、第1偏光フィルム30に注目した場合には、切れ目C1は、当該第1偏光フィルム30の後端部30bとなり、また、第2偏光フィルム30に注目した場合には、切れ目C1は、当該第2偏光フィルム30の先端部30aとなる。 In the long polarizing film 30 shown in FIG. 2, in the case of individually explaining polarizing films corresponding to individual glass substrates, the individual polarizing films are sequentially taken from the left side in FIG. 30, the second polarizing film 30, and so on. The cuts C1, C2,... May be the rear end in the traveling direction (hereinafter abbreviated as the rear end) in each polarizing film 30, and may also be the front end. . For example, in the case of focusing on the first polarizing film 30, the cut C1 is the rear end 30b of the first polarizing film 30, and in the case of focusing on the second polarizing film 30, the cut C1 is It becomes the tip 30 a of the second polarizing film 30.
 図1に戻って、実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1の個々の構成要素についてさらに詳細に説明する。 Returning to FIG. 1, individual components of the film member bonding apparatus 1 according to the embodiment will be described in more detail.
 テーブル100は、ステージ50に敷設されているガイドレール60上をx軸に沿って矢印x-x’方向に往復動可能となっている。なお、テーブル100は、ガイドレール60を走行可能なスライダー110と、当該スライダー110上に取り付けられているテーブル本体部120と、を有している。テーブル本体部120は、ガラス基板10(被貼り付け部材)を載置するものである。当該テーブル本体部120は、スライダー110とともにx軸に沿った往復動が可能となっているとともに、スライダー110に対して、y軸に沿った移動、xy平面上での回転及びz軸に沿った昇降が可能となっている。 The table 100 is capable of reciprocating on the guide rails 60 laid on the stage 50 along the x-axis in the direction of the arrow x-x '. The table 100 has a slider 110 capable of traveling on the guide rail 60 and a table main body 120 attached on the slider 110. The table main body 120 mounts the glass substrate 10 (member to be bonded). The table body 120 is capable of reciprocating along the x-axis with the slider 110, and moves along the y-axis, rotates on the xy plane, and along the z-axis with respect to the slider 110. It is possible to go up and down.
 このため、テーブル100には、テーブル本体部120のy軸に沿った位置調整を可能とするy軸方向位置調整機構と、テーブル本体部120のxy平面上での回転角度調整を可能とする回転角度調整機構と、テーブル本体部120のz軸に沿った昇降を可能とする昇降機構とが設けられている。これら、y軸方向位置調整機構、回転角度調整機構及び昇降機構については、種々の機構を採用することができるため、これら各機構の図示及び説明は省略する。また、スライダー110のx軸に沿った往復動制御、テーブル本体部120のy軸方向位置調整制御、回転角度調整制御及び昇降制御は、制御装置300が有する制御機能として行われる。 Therefore, in the table 100, the y-axis direction position adjustment mechanism that enables the position adjustment of the table main body 120 along the y-axis, and the rotation angle adjustment of the table main body 120 on the xy plane are possible. An angle adjustment mechanism and an elevation mechanism capable of raising and lowering the table main body 120 along the z-axis are provided. Since various mechanisms can be adopted for the y-axis direction position adjusting mechanism, the rotation angle adjusting mechanism, and the elevating mechanism, the illustration and description of the respective mechanisms will be omitted. Further, the reciprocation control along the x axis of the slider 110, the position adjustment control in the y axis direction of the table main body 120, the rotation angle adjustment control, and the elevation control are performed as control functions of the control device 300.
 なお、上記したようにテーブル100は、スライダー110とテーブル本体部120とを有するものであるが、この明細書においては、これらをまとめて「テーブル100」として説明する場合もある。従って、例えば、テーブル100がx軸に沿って移動するというのは、実際には、スライダー110とテーブル本体部120とが一体的にx軸に沿って移動することであり、テーブル100がz軸に沿って昇降するというのは、実際には、テーブル本体部120がスライダー110に対してz軸に沿って昇降することである。
 また、実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1においては、スライダー110、テーブル本体部120、ステージ50及びガイドレール60は、例えば、鉄などの金属でなるものとする。
As described above, the table 100 includes the slider 110 and the table main body 120. However, in this specification, these may be collectively described as the "table 100". Therefore, for example, the fact that the table 100 moves along the x axis means that the slider 110 and the table main body 120 move together along the x axis, and the table 100 is the z axis. In fact, the table body 120 moves up and down along the z-axis with respect to the slider 110.
Moreover, in the film member bonding apparatus 1 which concerns on embodiment, the slider 110, the table main-body part 120, the stage 50, and the guide rail 60 shall be metal, such as iron, for example.
 次に、リリースフィルム進行機構部220について説明する。
 リリースフィルム進行機構部220は、剥がし部210で折り返されたリリースフィルム40を偏光フィルム30の進行方向とほぼ反対方向(リリースフィルム進行方向)に進行させるものである。
 当該リリースフィルム進行機構部220は、貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部221(詳細は後述する。)と、剥がし部210の折り返し部211で折り返されたリリースフィルム40に対して当該リリースフィルム40が進行する方向(リリースフィルム進行方向)に沿ったテンションを付与するテンション付与部(実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1においてはダンサーロール222とする。)と、複数の進行補助ロール(例えば、進行補助ロール223,224)と、偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作を行うフィーダー225と、ダンサーロール222のさらに下流側(リリースフィルム進行方向の前方側)に設けられ、リリースフィルム40を巻き取るための巻き取りロール(図示せず。)などが設けられている。
Next, the release film advancing mechanism 220 will be described.
The release film advancing mechanism 220 advances the release film 40 folded back at the peeling part 210 in a direction substantially opposite to the advancing direction of the polarizing film 30 (release film advancing direction).
In the release film advancing mechanism 220, the release film 40 advances with respect to the release film 40 folded back by the sticking / peeling synchronization mechanism 221 (details will be described later) and the folding part 211 of the peeling part 210. A tension applying unit (a dancer roll 222 in the film member affixing device 1 according to the embodiment) for applying a tension along a direction (release film advancing direction), and a plurality of advance assisting rolls (for example, an advance assisting roll) 223, 224), a feeder 225 for performing a cueing operation of the polarizing film 30, and a take-up roll provided on the further downstream side of the dancer roll 222 (the front side in the release film advancing direction) (Not shown) etc. are provided.
 貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部221は、テンション付与部としてのダンサーロール222と剥がし部210との間に配置されている。そして、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作を行う際においては、リリースフィルム40をダンサーロール222と剥がし部210との間の所定位置でクランプし、当該クランプした位置と剥がし部210との間で、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作に能動的に同期させて偏光フィルム30からリリースフィルム40を剥がす動作を行う。なお、以下の説明においては、偏光フィルム30からリリースフィルム40を剥がす動作を「リリースフィルム40の剥がし動作」と略記する場合もある。 The sticking / peeling synchronization mechanism unit 221 is disposed between the dancer roll 222 as a tension applying unit and the peeling unit 210. When the polarizing film 30 is attached, the release film 40 is clamped at a predetermined position between the dancer roll 222 and the peeling portion 210, and polarization is performed between the clamped position and the peeling portion 210. The release film 40 is peeled off from the polarizing film 30 in active synchronization with the affixing operation of the film 30. In the following description, the operation of peeling the release film 40 from the polarizing film 30 may be abbreviated as “the peeling operation of the release film 40”.
 当該貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部221の具体的な構成要素としては、ダンサーロール222と剥がし部210との間の所定位置に設けられ、リリースフィルム40をダンサーロール222と剥がし部210との間の所定位置でクランプするクランパー221cと、当該クランパー221cと剥がし部210との間に位置し、かつ、フィルム部材供給機構部200の側に取り付けられており、剥がし部210で剥がされたリリースフィルム40を偏光フィルム30の進行方向とほぼ同方向に進行させるように折り返す第1折り返しロール221aと、クランパー221cと第1折り返しロール221aとの間に位置し、かつ、テーブル100の側に取り付けられており、第1折り返しロール221aで折り返されたリリースフィルム40を偏光フィルム30の進行方向とほぼ反対方向に進行させるように折り返す第2折り返しロール221bとを有している。 As a specific component of the pasting / peeling synchronization mechanism part 221, it is provided at a predetermined position between the dancer roll 222 and the peeling part 210, and the release film 40 is provided between the dancer roll 222 and the peeling part 210. The release film 40 which is located between the clamper 221c which clamps at a predetermined position, the clamper 221c and the peeling part 210 and is attached to the film member supply mechanism 200 side and peeled off by the peeling part 210 is The first folding roll 221a is folded back so as to advance in substantially the same direction as the advancing direction of the polarizing film 30, and is disposed between the clamper 221c and the first folding roll 221a and attached to the table 100 side. The release film 40 folded back by the first folding roll 221a And a second folding roll 221b to fold so as to travel in substantially opposite direction to the traveling direction of the light film 30.
 第1折り返しロール221aは、フィルム部材供給機構部200の側に取り付けられているため、テーブル100が移動したとしても位置は変化しない。一方、第2折り返しロール221bは、テーブル100の側(具体的には、テーブル100のスライダー110)に取り付けられているため、テーブル100(スライダー110)のx-x’方向の移動とともに移動する。 Since the first folding roll 221a is attached to the film member supply mechanism 200 side, the position does not change even if the table 100 moves. On the other hand, since the second folding roll 221b is attached to the side of the table 100 (specifically, the slider 110 of the table 100), the second folding roll 221b moves along with the movement of the table 100 (slider 110) in the x-x 'direction.
 また、クランパー221cは、偏光フィルム30をガラス基板10に貼り付けて行く動作を行う際においては、リリースフィルム40をクランプするが、フィーダー225によって偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作を行う際には、リリースフィルム40のクランプを解除する。このように構成されている貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部221の具体的な動作については後述する。なお、クランパー221cによるリリースフィルム40のクランプ/クランプ解除動作及びフィーダー225による偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作は、制御装置300が有する制御機能の1つとして行われる。 Further, the clamper 221c clamps the release film 40 when performing the operation of attaching the polarizing film 30 to the glass substrate 10, but when performing the indexing operation of the polarizing film 30 by the feeder 225, the release is performed. The clamp of the film 40 is released. The specific operation of the pasting / peeling synchronization mechanism section 221 configured in this way will be described later. The clamp / clamp release operation of the release film 40 by the clamper 221c and the cueing operation of the polarizing film 30 by the feeder 225 are performed as one of the control functions of the control device 300.
 フィーダー225は、クランパー221cと進行補助ロール223との間に設けられており、リリースフィルム40が剥がされた偏光フィルム30の先端部30aをガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに到達させるための機能、すなわち偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作を行う機能を有している。なお、フィーダー225は、リリースフィルム40をクランプするための複数のクランパー226を有し、x軸に沿って矢印x-x’方向に往復動可能となっている。 The feeder 225 is provided between the clamper 221c and the advancing auxiliary roll 223, and has a function for causing the leading end 30a of the polarizing film 30 from which the release film 40 has been peeled to reach the attachment start end 10a of the glass substrate 10. That is, it has a function to perform the cueing operation of the polarizing film 30. The feeder 225 has a plurality of clampers 226 for clamping the release film 40, and can reciprocate in the direction of the arrow x-x 'along the x-axis.
 フィーダー225に対する制御は、制御装置300が有する制御機能の1つとして行われる。この場合、制御装置300は、カメラ250からの撮影データに基づいて偏光フィルム30の所定部分(例えば後端部30b)の位置(x軸に沿った位置)を監視して、偏光フィルム30の先端部30aがガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに到達するようにフィーダー225を制御する。 Control of the feeder 225 is performed as one of the control functions of the controller 300. In this case, the control device 300 monitors the position (position along the x-axis) of a predetermined portion (for example, the rear end 30b) of the polarizing film 30 based on the imaging data from the camera 250. The feeder 225 is controlled so that the portion 30 a reaches the attachment start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10.
 制御装置300によるフィーダー225に対する制御の一例としては、例えば、制御装置300は、カメラ250からの撮影データに基づいて、現時点において貼り付け対象となっている偏光フィルム(第1偏光フィルム30とする。)の後端部30b(当該第1偏光フィルム30と第2偏光フィルム30との間の切れ目C1)の位置を監視し、当該後端部30b(切れ目C1)の位置が目標位置に到達するまで、フィーダー225を動作させる。 As an example of control on the feeder 225 by the control device 300, for example, the control device 300 sets a polarizing film (first polarizing film 30) to be attached at this point based on shooting data from the camera 250. Monitoring the position of the rear end 30b (the cut C1 between the first polarizing film 30 and the second polarizing film 30) until the position of the rear end 30b (the cut C1) reaches the target position , Feeder 225 is operated.
 具体的には、偏光フィルム30の先端部30aがガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに正しく到達しているときの当該偏光フィルム30の後端部30bの位置を「目標位置」として予め求めておき、制御装置300は、現時点において貼り付け対象となっている第1偏光フィルム30の後端部30b(切れ目C1)の位置が目標位置に達するまで、リリースフィルム40をリリースフィルム進行方向に進行させる。これにより、当該第1偏光フィルム30の頭出しを高い精度で行うことができる。すなわち、偏光フィルム30の先端部30aをガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに高い精度で到達させることができる。 Specifically, the position of the rear end 30b of the polarizing film 30 when the front end 30a of the polarizing film 30 correctly reaches the attachment start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 is previously determined as the "target position". The control device 300 advances the release film 40 in the release film advancing direction until the position of the rear end 30b (the cut C1) of the first polarizing film 30 to be attached at this point reaches the target position. Thus, the first polarizing film 30 can be pointed out with high accuracy. That is, the leading end 30 a of the polarizing film 30 can be made to reach the bonding start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 with high accuracy.
 そして、偏光フィルム30の後端部30b(切れ目C1)の位置が目標位置に到達すると、リリースフィルム40に対するフィーダー225のクランプ動作を解除して、フィーダー225を元の位置に復帰させるように制御する。 Then, when the position of the rear end portion 30b (the cut C1) of the polarizing film 30 reaches the target position, the clamp operation of the feeder 225 on the release film 40 is released to control the feeder 225 to return to the original position. .
 なお、カメラ250は、実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1においては、現時点において貼り付け対象となっている第1偏光フィルム30の後端部30b(切れ目C1)の位置を監視するようにしているが、これは、カメラ250を、仮に、現時点において貼り付け対象となっている第1偏光フィルム30の先端部30aの位置を監視する位置に設置しようとすると、押さえロール240の存在(図1参照。)などにより、カメラ250を設置するためのスペースに余裕がないためである。但し、カメラ250を設置するためのスペースに余裕があれば、現時点において貼り付け対象となっている第1偏光フィルム30の先端部30aの位置を監視するようにしてもよい。 In the film member bonding apparatus 1 according to the embodiment, the camera 250 monitors the position of the rear end 30b (the cut C1) of the first polarizing film 30 to be bonded at the present time. However, if the camera 250 is to be installed at a position where the position of the leading end 30a of the first polarizing film 30 to be attached at this time is to be monitored, the presence of the pressing roll 240 (FIG. This is because there is not enough space for installing the camera 250, etc.). However, if there is enough space for installing the camera 250, the position of the leading end 30a of the first polarizing film 30 to be attached at this point may be monitored.
 続いて、ガイド部材230及び押さえロール240について図3を参照して説明する。
 図3は、ガイド部材230及び押さえロール240を説明するために示す図である。図3(a)は図1の押さえロール240及び図1において破線枠Bで囲った範囲をそれぞれ拡大して示す図であり、図3(b)は図3(a)をz軸に沿って上から見た図(平面図)である。なお、図3(b)においては、図3(a)で示されている押さえロール240などは図示が省略されている。
Subsequently, the guide member 230 and the pressing roll 240 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 3 is a figure shown in order to demonstrate the guide member 230 and the press roll 240. As shown in FIG. 3 (a) is an enlarged view of the range enclosed by the broken line frame B in FIG. 1 and the pressing roll 240 of FIG. 1, and FIG. 3 (b) is a view along FIG. 3 (a) along the z axis. It is the figure (plan view) seen from the top. In FIG. 3 (b), the pressing roll 240 and the like shown in FIG. 3 (a) are not shown.
 まずは、ガイド部材230について説明する。ガイド部材230には、リリースフィルム40が剥がされた偏光フィルム30の進行をガイドするガイド面231が存在している。なお、図3も図1と同様に模式図であるため、当該ガイド部材230の取り付け構造は図示が省略されているが、当該ガイド部材230は、ステージ50から立設されている支持部材(図示せず。)に取り付けられている。当該支持部材も例えば鉄などの金属でなる。また、ガイド部材230は、例えば、ステンレス鋼などの金属によって形成されており、当該ガイド部材230のガイド面231(偏光フィルム30と接する側の面)は、非粘着性を有するものとなっている。すなわち、ガイド部材230のガイド面231には、導電性を維持した状態で非粘着性を有するような非粘着性表面加工が施されている。このように、ガイド面231に非粘着性表面加工を施す理由は、偏光フィルム30の一方の面は、接着剤31(図2参照。)が塗布された接着面となっているためである。 First, the guide member 230 will be described. The guide member 230 has a guide surface 231 for guiding the progress of the polarizing film 30 from which the release film 40 has been peeled off. Since FIG. 3 is also a schematic view as in FIG. 1, the attachment structure of the guide member 230 is not shown, but the guide member 230 is a support member standing from the stage 50 (see FIG. 3). Not shown). The support member is also made of metal such as iron. The guide member 230 is formed of, for example, a metal such as stainless steel, and the guide surface 231 (the surface on the side in contact with the polarizing film 30) of the guide member 230 has non-adhesiveness. . That is, the non-adhesive surface process which has non-adhesiveness in the state which maintained electroconductivity is given to the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230. FIG. As described above, the non-adhesive surface processing is performed on the guide surface 231 because one surface of the polarizing film 30 is an adhesive surface on which the adhesive 31 (see FIG. 2) is applied.
 すなわち、リリースフィルム40が剥がされた状態の偏光フィルム30の接着面は、接着剤31が塗布されているため、ガイド部材230のガイド面231に接着剤31の付着を防ぐ非粘着性表面加工が施されていないと、偏光フィルム30の接着剤31がガイド部材230のガイド面231に付着してしまい、偏光フィルム30がガイド部材230のガイド面231に沿ってスムーズに進行できないこととなるからである。 That is, since the adhesive 31 is applied to the adhesive surface of the polarizing film 30 in a state in which the release film 40 is peeled off, the non-adhesive surface processing for preventing the adhesive 31 from adhering to the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230 If not applied, the adhesive 31 of the polarizing film 30 adheres to the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230, and the polarizing film 30 can not progress smoothly along the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230. is there.
 接着剤31の付着を防ぐ非粘着性表面加工は、公知の技術であり、例えば、「トシカル(登録商標)Sコーティング加工」と呼ばれる表面加工の技術を採用することができる。このような表面加工(トシカル(登録商標)Sのコーティング被膜形成加工/株式会社トシコ)をガイド部材230のガイド面231に施すことによって、リリースフィルム40が剥がされた偏光フィルム30の接着面がガイド部材230のガイド面231に付着することなく、偏光フィルム30をスムーズに進行させてガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに進行させることができる。トシカル(登録商標)Sとしては、例えば、UNA―300シリーズ(UNA―310-X10)、UNA―800シリーズ、TS-1000シリーズ、TS-1080シリーズ、TS-1310シリーズのものを好適に用いることができる。 The non-adhesive surface treatment for preventing the adhesion of the adhesive 31 is a known technique, and for example, a technique of surface treatment called “TOICAL (registered trademark) S coating treatment” can be adopted. By applying such surface treatment (Tosical (registered trademark) S coating film formation / Tosico Co., Ltd.) to the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230, the adhesive surface of the polarizing film 30 from which the release film 40 is peeled is a guide Without adhering to the guide surface 231 of the member 230, the polarizing film 30 can be smoothly advanced to the adhesion start end 10a of the glass substrate 10. As Toshikal (registered trademark) S, for example, those of UNA-300 series (UNA-310-X10), UNA-800 series, TS-1000 series, TS-1080 series, TS-1310 series should preferably be used. it can.
 トシカル(登録商標)Sのコーティング被膜の膜厚は、例えば、1μm~200μm、好ましくは3μm~150μmのものを好適に用いることができる。トシカル(登録商標)Sのコーティング被膜を形成する前に、ガイド部材230のガイド面231に凹凸構造を形成しておいてもよい。この場合の凹凸構造の平均表面粗さとしては、2μm~15μmのものを好適に用いることができる。 The film thickness of the coating film of Toshikal (registered trademark) S is, for example, 1 μm to 200 μm, preferably 3 μm to 150 μm. An uneven structure may be formed on the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230 before forming the coating film of Toshikal (registered trademark) S. The average surface roughness of the concavo-convex structure in this case is preferably 2 μm to 15 μm.
 このような非非粘着性表面加工をガイド部材230のガイド面231に施すことによって、リリースフィルム40が剥がされた偏光フィルム30の接着面がガイド部材230のガイド面231に付着することなく、偏光フィルム30をスムーズに進行させてガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに進行させることができる。このような表面加工は、導電性を損なうことのない非粘着性表面加工である。従って、ガイド面231は、非粘着性表面加工が施された後でも導電性が維持されたものとなっている。このため、ガイド面231の導電性は損なわれることがない。また、当該ガイド面231は、電気的に接地されている。すなわち、ガイド面231は、導電性を有するとともに接地されている。このように、ガイド面231が導電性を有するとともに接地されていることの理由については後述する。 By applying such non-tacky surface processing to the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230, the adhesive surface of the polarizing film 30 from which the release film 40 is peeled does not adhere to the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230. The film 30 can be smoothly advanced to the adhesion start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10. Such surface processing is non-adhesive surface processing without loss of conductivity. Therefore, the guide surface 231 is such that the conductivity is maintained even after the non-adhesive surface processing is performed. For this reason, the conductivity of the guide surface 231 is not impaired. Further, the guide surface 231 is electrically grounded. That is, the guide surface 231 has conductivity and is grounded. The reason why the guide surface 231 is conductive and grounded will be described later.
 また、ガイド部材230は、実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1においては、3角形のブロック状とし、当該ガイド部材230の先端部232がエッジとなっているとともに、ガイド面231がガラス基板10に対して鋭角をなすように配置されている。なお、以下、ガイド部材230の先端部232を「ガイド部材先端部232」と表記する。 Moreover, in the film member affixing device 1 according to the embodiment, the guide member 230 has a triangular block shape, and the tip end portion 232 of the guide member 230 is an edge, and the guide surface 231 is the glass substrate 10 It is arranged to make an acute angle to. Hereinafter, the distal end portion 232 of the guide member 230 will be referred to as “guide member distal end portion 232”.
 このように構成されているガイド部材230は、図3(a)に示すように、ガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aが、押さえロール240の押圧点Pを通る垂線L上の位置(貼り付け動作開始位置という。)に到達したときにおいて、ガイド面231の延長上にガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aが位置するように設置されている。 In the guide member 230 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 3A, the position where the bonding start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 is on the perpendicular L passing through the pressing point P of the pressing roll 240 (pasting operation When it reaches a start position, it is installed so that pasting start end 10a of glass substrate 10 may be located on extension of guide surface 231.
 また、当該ガイド部材230は、z軸に沿った位置としては、テーブル100に載置されているガラス基板10に接触しないような位置で、かつ、ガイド部材先端部232とガラス基板10との段差が小さくなるような位置に設置されている。なお、押さえロール240の「押圧点P」というのは、押さえロール240が偏光フィルム30を押さえ付ける動作を行う際に、偏光フィルム30に対して押圧力を与える点を指すものとする。 Further, the guide member 230 is a position along the z-axis that does not contact the glass substrate 10 placed on the table 100, and a step between the guide member distal end portion 232 and the glass substrate 10 Is placed at a position where the The “pressure point P” of the pressing roll 240 refers to a point that applies a pressing force to the polarizing film 30 when the pressing roll 240 performs an operation of pressing the polarizing film 30.
 ここで、ガイド面231の傾斜角度、すなわち、ガイド面231とxy平面とのなす角度θ(ガイド面231とテーブル100に載置されているガラス基板10とのなす角度θ)は、実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1においては、30度に設定されているものとする。なお、ガイド面231とガラス基板10とのなす角度θは、30度に限定されるものではなく、偏光フィルム30の先端部30aがガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aにスムーズに到達できればよい。 Here, the inclination angle of the guide surface 231, that is, the angle θ between the guide surface 231 and the xy plane (the angle θ between the guide surface 231 and the glass substrate 10 mounted on the table 100) is an embodiment. In the film member affixing device 1 concerned, it shall be set as 30 degrees. The angle θ between the guide surface 231 and the glass substrate 10 is not limited to 30 degrees, as long as the leading end 30 a of the polarizing film 30 can smoothly reach the bonding start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10.
 また、ガイド部材230の設置位置は、ガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aが貼り付け動作開始位置に到達したときにおける当該ガイド部材230の先端部232とガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aとの間隔(x軸に沿った間隔)dが可能な限り狭くするように設置されることが好ましい。なお、間隔dは、ガイド面231の傾斜角度などによって異なるが、実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1においては、間隔dを15mmとしている。当該間隔dは、15mmに限定されるものではなく、ガイド部材230のガイド面231のxy平面に対する角度、偏光フィルム30の材質及びサイズなどによって最適な値に設定することができる。 Further, the installation position of the guide member 230 is the distance between the tip end portion 232 of the guide member 230 and the adhesion start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 when the adhesion start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 reaches the adhesion operation start position It is preferable that the distance d) along the x axis be set as narrow as possible. In addition, although the space | interval d changes with the inclination angles of the guide surface 231, etc., in the film member affixing apparatus 1 which concerns on embodiment, the space | interval d is 15 mm. The distance d is not limited to 15 mm, and can be set to an optimal value according to the angle of the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230 with respect to the xy plane, the material and size of the polarizing film 30, and the like.
 また、ガイド部材230は、電気的に接地(アース)されている。具体的には、ガイド部材230は、前述したように、ステージ50(図1参照。)に立設されている支持部材(図示せず。)に取り付けられており、これら支持部材及びステージ50はともに金属でなるため、ガイド部材230は、当該支持部材及びステージ50を介して電気的に接地(アース)されたものとなっている。このため、当該ガイド部材231が有するガイド面231は、必然的に接地されることとなる。 In addition, the guide member 230 is electrically grounded. Specifically, as described above, the guide member 230 is attached to a support member (not shown) erected on the stage 50 (see FIG. 1), and these support member and the stage 50 Since both are made of metal, the guide member 230 is electrically grounded via the support member and the stage 50. For this reason, the guide surface 231 which the said guide member 231 has will be earth | grounded inevitably.
 なお、先に説明した図1は実施形態1に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1を模式的に示す図であるため、ステージ50の具体的な設置状態などについては示されていないが、ステージ50は工場などの床に電気的に接地(アース)された状態で設置されているものとする。これにより、ガイド部材230はそのガイド面231を含めて、支持部材及びステージ50を介して電気的に接地(アース)されたものとなる。 In addition, since FIG. 1 demonstrated previously is a figure which shows the film member affixing apparatus 1 concerning Embodiment 1 typically, although it does not show about the specific installation state of the stage 50, etc., the stage 50 It shall be installed in the state where it was electrically grounded to the floor of a factory etc. (earth). As a result, the guide member 230 including the guide surface 231 is electrically grounded via the support member and the stage 50.
 以上説明したように、ガイド部材230は、ガイド部材先端部232がエッジとなっているため、当該ガイド部材先端部232とガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aとの間隔を可能な限り狭くすることができるとともに、ガイド部材先端部232とガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aとの間の段差を可能な限り小さくできる。これにより、偏光フィルム30(フィルム部材)の先端部30aがガラス基板10(被貼り付け部材)の貼り付け始端10aに到達するまでの距離を短くすることができ、偏光フィルム30が貼り付け始端10aに到達するまでの間において、自重によって撓んでしまうといったことを防止できる。それによって、ガイド面231を進行する偏光フィルム30の先端部30aをガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに高い精度で到達させることができる。 As described above, since the guide member distal end portion 232 is an edge, in the guide member 230, the distance between the guide member distal end portion 232 and the adhesion start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 can be made as narrow as possible. While being possible, the level | step difference between the guide member front-end | tip part 232 and the adhesion | pasting start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 can be made as small as possible. Thereby, the distance until the leading end 30a of the polarizing film 30 (film member) reaches the bonding start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 (member to be bonded) can be shortened, and the polarizing film 30 is bonded start end 10a It is possible to prevent it from being bent by its own weight until it reaches. As a result, the leading end 30 a of the polarizing film 30 traveling on the guide surface 231 can be made to reach the bonding start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 with high accuracy.
 また、ガイド部材230は、当該ガイド面231の延長上にガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aが位置するように設置されているため、これによっても、ガイド面231を進行する偏光フィルム30の先端部30aをガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに高い精度で到達させることができる。 Moreover, since the guide member 230 is installed so that the adhesion start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 is positioned on the extension of the guide surface 231, the tip end of the polarizing film 30 traveling on the guide surface 231 is also thereby 30a can be made to reach the bonding start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 with high accuracy.
 また、ガイド部材230は、ステンレス鋼などの金属によって形成されており、当該ガイド部材230のガイド面231は、導電性を有するとともに電気的に接地(アース)されている。このため、偏光フィルム30に静電気が帯電した場合であっても、偏光フィルム30に帯電した静電気を除去できる。これにより、偏光フィルム30に埃やゴミなどが付着しにくくなるとともに、偏光フィルム30を被貼り付け部材としてのガラス基板10に貼り付ける動作を行う際に、高い精度でフィルム部材をガラス基板10に貼り付けることができる。また、偏光フィルム30が貼り付けられたガラス基板10を次の工程に送る際に、静電気が帯電したままの状態で次の工程に送られてしまうことを防ぐことができる。 Further, the guide member 230 is formed of metal such as stainless steel, and the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230 has conductivity and is electrically grounded (earthed). Therefore, even when static electricity is charged on the polarizing film 30, the static electricity charged on the polarizing film 30 can be removed. As a result, dust and dirt are less likely to be attached to the polarizing film 30, and the film member is attached to the glass substrate 10 with high accuracy when performing the operation of attaching the polarizing film 30 to the glass substrate 10 as a member to be attached. It can be pasted. In addition, when the glass substrate 10 to which the polarizing film 30 is attached is sent to the next process, it is possible to prevent the static electricity from being sent to the next process while being charged.
 特に、偏光フィルム30の接着面(具体的には、偏光フィルム30に塗布されている接着剤31)に静電気が帯電した場合でも、偏光フィルム30の接着面(接着剤31が塗布されている面)が、導電性を有するガイド面231に接触することによって、接着面(接着剤31)に帯電した静電気を確実に除去できる。これにより、偏光フィルム30が貼り付けられたガラス基板10を次の工程に送る際に、ガラス基板10と偏光フィルム30との間に静電気が帯電したままの状態で次の工程に送られてしまうことを防ぐことができる。ガラス基板10と偏光フィルム30との間に静電気が帯電すると、容易には、静電気を除去することができないため、偏光フィルム30の接着面が導電性を有するガイド面に接触するだけで、接着面に帯電した静電気を確実に除去できることは、静電気対策として極めて有効なものとなる。 In particular, even when static electricity is charged on the adhesive surface of the polarizing film 30 (specifically, the adhesive 31 applied to the polarizing film 30), the adhesive surface of the polarizing film 30 (the surface on which the adhesive 31 is applied) By contacting the conductive guide surface 231, the static electricity charged on the adhesive surface (adhesive 31) can be reliably removed. As a result, when the glass substrate 10 to which the polarizing film 30 is attached is sent to the next step, the electrostatic charge is sent between the glass substrate 10 and the polarizing film 30 to the next step in a state of being charged. You can prevent that. When static electricity is charged between the glass substrate 10 and the polarizing film 30, the static electricity can not be easily removed, so that the bonding surface of the polarizing film 30 simply contacts the conductive guide surface, It is extremely effective as a countermeasure against static electricity that it is possible to reliably remove the static electricity that has been charged.
 続いて、押さえロール240について説明する。押さえロール240は、図3(a)に示すように、径の異なる2個のロール241,242が垂線Lに沿って2段に重ねられた構成(2段重ねの構成)となっており、それぞれの回転軸241a,242aが、偏光フィルム30の先端部30aに沿う方向(y軸に沿う方向)となるように設置されている。第1押さえロール241,242は、それぞれの回転軸241a,242aが押さえロール取り付け部材243に回転自在に取り付けられている。なお、押さえロール取り付け部材243は、フィルム部材供給機構部200に取り付けられている。 Subsequently, the presser roll 240 will be described. As shown in FIG. 3A, the presser roll 240 has a configuration in which two rolls 241 and 242 having different diameters are stacked in two stages along the perpendicular line L (two-stage stacked configuration), The rotary shafts 241 a and 242 a are disposed in a direction along the front end 30 a of the polarizing film 30 (a direction along the y-axis). The rotary shafts 241 a and 242 a of the first pressing rolls 241 and 242 are rotatably attached to the pressing roll attachment member 243. The pressing roll attachment member 243 is attached to the film member supply mechanism 200.
 ここで、2個の押さえロール241,242のうち、偏光フィルム30に接触する側に位置する押さえロール241を第1押さえロール241とし、他の押さえロール242を第2押さえロール242としたとき、当該第1押さえロール241の径Φ1(図3(a)参照。)は、第2押さえロール242の径Φ2よりも小さく設定されている。実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1においては、第1押さえロール241の径Φ1は10mm程度としている。このように、第1押さえロール241と第2押さえロール242とを2段重ねの構成とする理由及び第1押さえロール241の径Φ1を第2押さえロール242の径Φ2よりも小さく設定した理由については後述する。 Here, among the two holding rolls 241 and 242, when the holding roll 241 positioned on the side contacting the polarizing film 30 is the first holding roll 241 and the other holding roll 242 is the second holding roll 242, The diameter Φ1 (see FIG. 3A) of the first pressing roll 241 is set smaller than the diameter 22 of the second pressing roll 242. In the film member bonding apparatus 1 according to the embodiment, the diameter 11 of the first pressing roll 241 is about 10 mm. As described above, the reason why the first presser roll 241 and the second presser roll 242 are configured to be two-tiered and the reason why the diameter Φ1 of the first presser roll 241 is set smaller than the diameter Φ2 of the second presser roll 242 Will be described later.
 このように構成されている押さえロール240(第1押さえロール241及び第2押さえロール242)は、押さえロール取り付け部材243とともにz軸に沿った方向(矢印z-z’方向)に上下動可能となっており、実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1が、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作を行っていないときにおいては、テーブル100上に載置されたガラス基板10を含む平面(xy平面)に対して離脱(上方に位置)しており、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作を行うときにおいては、下降して、偏光フィルム30を押さえ付ける動作を行うようになっている。押さえロール240の上昇及び下降動作は、制御装置300が有する制御機能の1つとして行われる。 The presser roll 240 (the first presser roll 241 and the second presser roll 242) configured in this way, together with the presser roll mounting member 243, can move up and down in the direction along the z axis (the direction of the arrow zz '). When the film member affixing device 1 according to the embodiment does not perform the affixing operation of the polarizing film 30, it is in a plane (xy plane) including the glass substrate 10 placed on the table 100. On the other hand, when the polarizing film 30 is pasted, it is lowered to perform an operation of pressing the polarizing film 30. The raising and lowering operations of the pressing roll 240 are performed as one of the control functions of the control device 300.
 ところで、第1押さえロール241の径Φ1を第2押さえロール242の径Φ2よリも小さくし、かつ、小さい径の第1押さえロール241の上に大きな径の第2押さえロール242を重ねた構成としたのは、次に述べる理由によるものである。 By the way, the configuration in which the diameter 11 of the first pressing roller 241 is smaller than the diameter Φ2 of the second pressing roller 242, and the second pressing roller 242 having a large diameter is superimposed on the first pressing roller 241 having a smaller diameter. It is because of the following reason.
 すなわち、ガラス基板10が貼り付け動作開始位置に到達したときにおいて、ガイド部材先端部232とガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aとの間隔dは、上記したように15mmというように狭い間隔しているために、第1押さえロール241が偏光フィルム30を押さえ付けた状態となったときに、第1押さえロール241がガイド部材230に接触しないようにするためである。 That is, when the glass substrate 10 reaches the bonding operation start position, the distance d between the guide member distal end portion 232 and the bonding start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 is as narrow as 15 mm as described above. In order to prevent the first presser roll 241 from coming into contact with the guide member 230 when the first presser roll 241 holds the polarizing film 30.
 すなわち、第1押さえロール241がガイド部材230に接触しないようにするためには、第1押さえロール241の径Φ1をできるだけ小さくする必要がある。一方、第1押さえロール241の径を小さくすると、第1押さえロール241だけでは、偏光フィルム30を押さえ付けるための押圧力が偏光フィルム30の幅方向(この場合はy軸に沿った幅)全体に渡って均一に付与されない場合があるといった問題が生じる。 That is, in order to prevent the first pressing roll 241 from contacting the guide member 230, it is necessary to make the diameter 11 of the first pressing roll 241 as small as possible. On the other hand, when the diameter of the first pressing roll 241 is reduced, the pressing force for pressing the polarizing film 30 is the entire width direction of the polarizing film 30 (in this case, the width along the y axis) only with the first pressing roll 241 There is a problem that it may not be uniformly applied over the
 具体的に言えば、偏光フィルム30の幅方向(図3におけるy軸に沿った方向)の長さは、この場合、890mm程度としている。このように、偏光フィルム30の幅方向(図3におけるy軸に沿った方向)の長さが890mm程度というように長い場合には、第1押さえロール241の回転軸241aに沿った長さ(y軸に沿った長さ)も長くなる。ここで、第1押さえロール241の回転軸241aに沿った長さに対して径Φ1が小さいと、反りが生じてしまう場合もあり、反りが生じてしまうと、押圧力が幅方向全体に渡って均一に付与されないこととなる。そこで、第1押さえロール241の径Φ1はできるだけ小さくしながらも、押圧点Pによる押圧力が偏光フィルム30の幅方向全体に渡って均一に付与されるように、小さい径の第1押さえロール241の上に大きな径の第2押さえロール242を重ねた構成としている。 Specifically, the length of the polarizing film 30 in the width direction (direction along the y-axis in FIG. 3) is about 890 mm in this case. Thus, when the length in the width direction (direction along the y-axis in FIG. 3) of the polarizing film 30 is as long as about 890 mm, the length along the rotation axis 241 a of the first pressing roll 241 ( The length along the y-axis also increases. Here, if the diameter 11 is smaller than the length of the first presser roll 241 along the rotation shaft 241a, warpage may occur, and if warpage occurs, the pressing force extends over the entire width direction. It will not be applied uniformly. Therefore, while the diameter 11 of the first pressing roller 241 is as small as possible, the first pressing roller 241 with a small diameter is provided so that the pressing force by the pressing point P is uniformly applied over the entire width direction of the polarizing film 30. The second pressing roll 242 having a large diameter is stacked on top of the other.
 押さえロール240をこのような構成とすることによって、ガイド部材先端部232とガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aとの間隔dが15mmと狭くても、第1押さえロール241がガイド部材230に接触することなく、偏光フィルム30を確実に押さえ付けることができる。また、第2押さえロール242が第1押さえロール241の反りを防いで偏光フィルム30を幅方向(y軸方向)全体に渡って均一な押圧力で確実に押さえ付けることができる。このように、第2押さえロール242は、第1押さえロール241の押圧力をバックアップするためのバックアップロールとして機能する。 With such a configuration of the presser roll 240, the first presser roll 241 contacts the guide member 230 even if the distance d between the guide member tip portion 232 and the attachment start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 is as narrow as 15 mm. Therefore, the polarizing film 30 can be reliably pressed. Further, the second holding roll 242 can prevent the first holding roll 241 from being warped, so that the polarizing film 30 can be reliably held with uniform pressing force over the entire width direction (y-axis direction). Thus, the second pressing roll 242 functions as a backup roll for backing up the pressing force of the first pressing roll 241.
 次に、実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1の動作について説明する。
 図4は、実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1の動作を説明するために示す図である。
 図5は、実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1の動作(図4の続きの動作)を説明するために示す図である。
Next, the operation of the film member bonding apparatus 1 according to the embodiment will be described.
FIG. 4 is a figure shown in order to demonstrate the operation | movement of the film member affixing device 1 which concerns on embodiment.
FIG. 5 is a figure shown in order to demonstrate the operation | movement (operation | movement of the continuation of FIG. 4) of the film member affixing apparatus 1 which concerns on embodiment.
 図4(a)は貼り付け動作開始前の状態であり、この状態をこの初期状態とする。この初期状態においては、テーブル100は、押さえロール240(第1押さえロール241及び第2押さえロール242)よりも図示左側の位置(スタート位置)となっている。なお、初期状態においては、テーブル100上には、現時点において被貼り付け対象となるガラス基板10(第1ガラス基板10とする。)がテーブル100上の所定位置に載置されているものとする。また、テーブル100のスタート位置からのx軸に沿った移動量、y軸に沿った位置及びz軸周りの角度(平面上での角度)などは、適正に調整されているものとする。また、初期状態においては、テーブル100のz軸に沿った上下方向位置は、上下方向基準位置hとなっているものとする。 FIG. 4A shows a state before the start of the paste operation, and this state is referred to as this initial state. In this initial state, the table 100 is at a position (start position) on the left side of the drawing with respect to the pressing roll 240 (the first pressing roll 241 and the second pressing roll 242). In the initial state, on the table 100, it is assumed that the glass substrate 10 (referred to as the first glass substrate 10) to be attached at this time is placed at a predetermined position on the table 100. . Further, it is assumed that the amount of movement of the table 100 from the start position along the x axis, the position along the y axis, the angle around the z axis (angle on a plane), and the like are properly adjusted. In the initial state, the vertical position of the table 100 along the z-axis is assumed to be the vertical reference position h.
 また、リリースフィルム40は巻き取り側の先端部(図示せず。)が、リリースフィルム40を巻き取るための巻き取りロール(図示せず。)に接続されており、現時点において貼り付け対象となる偏光フィルム(第1偏光フィルム30とする。)の先端部30aは、剥がし部210の先端部(折り返し部211)に達しているものとする。また、この初期状態においては、押さえロール240(第1押さえロール241及び第2押さえロール242)は、テーブル100上に載置されたガラス基板10を含む平面(xy平面)に対して離脱(上方に位置)している。 In addition, the release film 40 has a leading end (not shown) on the take-up side connected to a take-up roll (not shown) for taking up the release film 40, and is to be attached at this time The tip 30 a of the polarizing film (referred to as the first polarizing film 30) is assumed to reach the tip (folded portion 211) of the peeling portion 210. Further, in this initial state, the presser roll 240 (the first presser roll 241 and the second presser roll 242) is disengaged (upward from the plane (xy plane) including the glass substrate 10 placed on the table 100. Position).
 図4(a)に示す初期状態において、まずは、制御装置300によってテーブル100をx軸に沿って右方向(矢印x方向)に所定の移動量だけ進行させるように制御する。これにより、テーブル100は図4(b)に示す位置(貼り付け動作開始位置)に進行する。具体的には、制御装置300は、第1ガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aが、押さえロール240の押圧点Pに対向する位置に到達するように、テーブル100をx軸に沿って右方向(矢印x方向)に移動させるように制御する。なお、ここでは、被貼り付け対象となるガラス基板は「第1ガラス基板10」であるが、「第1」を省略して「ガラス基板10」と表記する場合もある。 In the initial state shown in FIG. 4A, first, the control device 300 controls the table 100 to advance in the right direction (arrow x direction) along the x axis by a predetermined movement amount. As a result, the table 100 advances to the position shown in FIG. 4B (the paste operation start position). Specifically, the control device 300 moves the table 100 in the right direction along the x axis so that the attachment start end 10 a of the first glass substrate 10 reaches a position facing the pressing point P of the pressing roll 240 ( It is controlled to move in the arrow x direction). Here, the glass substrate to be bonded is the “first glass substrate 10”, but the “first” may be omitted and described as “the glass substrate 10”.
 このように、テーブル100がx軸に沿って右方向(矢印x方向)に移動すると、ガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aが、押さえロール240の押圧点Pに対向する位置に到達する。この状態で、制御装置300は、当該制御装置300が有するフィルム部材頭出し制御機構によって、第1偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作を行うが、第1偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作を行う前に、制御装置300は、当該制御装置300が有するテーブル昇降制御機能によって、昇降機構に対し、テーブル100を上下方向基準位置hよりもz軸に沿って所定量Δh(図4(b)参照。)だけ下降(退避)させるように制御する。なお、ここでは、貼り付け対象となる偏光フィルムは「第1偏光フィルム30」であるが、「第1」を省略して「偏光フィルム30」と表記する場合もある。 As described above, when the table 100 moves in the right direction (the arrow x direction) along the x axis, the pasting end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 reaches a position facing the pressing point P of the pressing roll 240. In this state, the control device 300 performs the cueing operation of the first polarizing film 30 by the film member cueing control mechanism of the control device 300, but before the cueing operation of the first polarizing film 30 is performed, The control device 300 causes the table elevating control function of the control device 300 to move the table 100 by a predetermined amount Δh (see FIG. 4B) along the z-axis rather than the vertical direction reference position h. Control to lower (retract). Here, the polarizing film to be attached is the “first polarizing film 30”, but the “first” may be omitted and described as “polarizing film 30”.
 制御装置300がこのような制御を行うことによって、テーブル100は、図4(b)に示すように、ガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aが、押さえロール240の押圧点Pに対向する位置で、かつ、上下方向基準位置hよりもz軸に沿って所定量Δhだけ下降した位置となる。ここでの「所定量Δh」というのは、偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作を行う際に、頭出しされた偏光フィルム30の先端部30aが、テーブル100上に載置されているガラス基板10に接触することを確実に防ぐことができる程度であればよく、例えば、数mm~数10mm程度でよい。なお、この「所定量Δh」は、特に限定されるものではなく、適宜、最適な量に設定可能である。 With the control device 300 performing such control, as shown in FIG. 4B, the table 100 is positioned at a position where the adhesion start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 faces the pressing point P of the pressing roll 240. Also, the position is lower than the vertical direction reference position h by a predetermined amount Δh along the z-axis. Here, “predetermined amount Δh” means that the front end portion 30 a of the polarizing film 30 that has been pointed out is placed on the glass substrate 10 placed on the table 100 when performing the cueing operation of the polarizing film 30. It may be of such an extent that contact can be reliably prevented, for example, several mm to several tens of mm. The “predetermined amount Δh” is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set to an optimal amount.
 図4(b)に示すように、ガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aが、押さえロール240の押圧点Pに対向する位置で、かつ、上下方向基準位置hよりもz軸に沿って所定量Δhだけ下降した位置となった状態で、制御装置300は、当該制御装置300が有するフィルム部材頭出し制御機能によって、偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作を行うようにフィーダー225を制御する。 As shown in FIG. 4B, at the position where the adhesion start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 faces the pressing point P of the pressing roll 240, a predetermined amount Δh along the z-axis relative to the vertical direction reference position h. In the state of being lowered only, the control device 300 controls the feeder 225 to perform the cueing operation of the polarizing film 30 by the film member cueing control function of the control device 300.
 これにより、フィーダー225は、図4(c)に示すように、リリースフィルム40をクランパー226によってクランプして、当該リリースフィルム40を所定量だけリリースフィルム進行方向(矢印x方向)に進行させる。制御装置300がこのような制御を行うことによって、リリースフィルム40が剥がされた偏光フィルム30の先端部30aが、ガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに対向する位置に到達する。すなわち、偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作がなされる。但し、この時点では、テーブル100は、下降した状態となっているため、偏光フィルム30の先端部30aは、ガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに接触しない。なお、このような偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作を行う際には、制御装置300は、貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部221のクランパー221cに対し、リリースフィルム40のクランプを解除するように制御する。 As a result, as shown in FIG. 4C, the feeder 225 clamps the release film 40 by the clamper 226 and advances the release film 40 by a predetermined amount in the release film advancing direction (arrow x direction). By the control device 300 performing such control, the leading end 30 a of the polarizing film 30 from which the release film 40 has been peeled reaches a position where the leading end 30 a of the glass substrate 10 faces the sticking start end 10 a. That is, the operation for picking up the polarizing film 30 is performed. However, at this time, since the table 100 is in a lowered state, the leading end 30 a of the polarizing film 30 does not contact the attachment start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10. In addition, when performing the indexing operation of such a polarizing film 30, the control device 300 controls the clamper 221c of the affixing / peeling synchronization mechanism portion 221 to release the clamp of the release film 40.
 ここで、偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作を具体的に説明する。フィーダー225によってリリースフィルム40を所定量だけリリースフィルム進行方向(矢印x方向)に進行させると、剥がし部210によって偏光フィルム30からリリースフィルム40が剥がされて行くとともに、リリースフィルム40が剥がされた偏光フィルム30が、ガイド部材230のガイド面231を進行して行き、当該偏光フィルム30の先端部30aがガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに対向する位置に到達する(図4(c)参照。)。但し、この時点においては、テーブル100は、下降(退避)した状態にあるため、偏光フィルム30の進行方向先端部30aは、ガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aには接触していない状態となっている。 Here, the cueing operation of the polarizing film 30 will be specifically described. When the release film 40 is advanced in the release film advancing direction (arrow x direction) by a predetermined amount by the feeder 225, the release film 40 is peeled off from the polarizing film 30 by the peeling section 210 and the polarized light is peeled off. The film 30 travels on the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230, and reaches the position where the leading end 30a of the polarizing film 30 faces the attachment start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 (see FIG. 4C). . However, at this point in time, since the table 100 is in a lowered (retracted) state, the front end 30a of the polarizing film 30 in the traveling direction is not in contact with the affixing start end 10a of the glass substrate 10. There is.
 また、偏光フィルム30が、ガイド部材230のガイド面231を進行する際には、ガイド部材230のガイド面231は非粘着性表面加工が施されているため、リリースフィルム40が剥がされた偏光フィルム30がガイド部材230のガイド面231を進行して行く際に、偏光フィルム30の接着面がガイド部材230のガイド面231に付着することなく、偏光フィルム30をスムーズに進行させることができる。 In addition, when the polarizing film 30 travels on the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230, the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230 is subjected to non-adhesive surface processing, so the polarizing film from which the release film 40 is peeled off When 30 travels on the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230, the polarizing film 30 can be smoothly advanced without the adhesive surface of the polarizing film 30 adhering to the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230.
 ところで、上記したような制御装置300によるフィーダー225に対する制御は、カメラ250からの撮影画像データに基づいて行われる。制御装置300によるフィーダー225に対する制御の一例としては、前述したように、制御装置300は、カメラ250からの撮影データに基づいて、現時点において貼り付け対象となっている偏光フィルム30(第1偏光フィルム30)の後端部30b(切れ目C1)の位置を監視し、当該後端部30b(切れ目C1)の位置が目標位置に到達するまで、フィーダー225を動作させる。これにより、偏光フィルム30の先端部30aがガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに到達する。このように、偏光フィルム30の先端部30aがガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに到達すると、制御装置300はフィーダー225に対して、リリースフィルム40のクランプを解除させるように制御する。これによって、フィーダー225は初期状態の位置に復帰する。 The control on the feeder 225 by the control device 300 as described above is performed based on the photographed image data from the camera 250. As an example of control with respect to the feeder 225 by the control device 300, as described above, the control device 300 is a polarizing film 30 (first polarizing film) to be attached at this time based on shooting data from the camera 250 The position of the rear end 30b (cut C1) of 30) is monitored, and the feeder 225 is operated until the position of the rear end 30b (cut C1) reaches the target position. As a result, the leading end 30 a of the polarizing film 30 reaches the bonding start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10. As described above, when the leading end 30 a of the polarizing film 30 reaches the attachment start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10, the control device 300 controls the feeder 225 to release the clamp of the release film 40. By this, the feeder 225 returns to the initial position.
 フィーダー225がリリースフィルム40をリリースフィルム進行方向に進行させると、ダンサーロール222は、フィーダー225が移動した分だけ下降する動作を行う。このようなダンサーロール222を設けることによって、フィーダー225による偏光フィルム30の供給動作(頭出し動作)と、巻き取りロール(図示せず。)によるリリースフィルム40の巻き取り動作とは同期をとる必要はなく、それぞれの動作を独立して行うことができる。巻き取りロール(図示せず。)によるリリースフィルム40の巻き取り動作は、ダンサーロール222の下降量が所定量に達した場合に行うようにすればよい。 When the feeder 225 advances the release film 40 in the release film advancing direction, the dancer roll 222 moves downward by the amount of movement of the feeder 225. By providing such a dancer roll 222, it is necessary to synchronize the feeding operation (heading operation) of the polarizing film 30 by the feeder 225 and the winding operation of the release film 40 by the winding roller (not shown). Rather, each operation can be performed independently. The take-up operation of the release film 40 by the take-up roll (not shown) may be performed when the descent amount of the dancer roll 222 reaches a predetermined amount.
 なお、ダンサーロール222は、フィーダー225による偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作時だけでなく、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作時においても機能する。すなわち、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作時においても、テーブル100が移動する動作と、巻き取りロールによるリリースフィルムの巻き取り動作とは同期をとる必要はなく、それぞれの動作を独立して行うことができる。例えば、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作時においては、巻き取りロールによるリリースフィルムの巻き取り動作は、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作が終了して、クランパー221cがリリースフィルム40のクランプを解除した後の所定のタイミングで行えばよい。 The dancer roll 222 functions not only at the time of the cueing operation of the polarizing film 30 by the feeder 225 but also at the time of the sticking operation of the polarizing film 30. That is, even during the attaching operation of the polarizing film 30, the operation of moving the table 100 and the winding operation of the release film by the winding roll do not need to be synchronized, and each operation may be performed independently. it can. For example, in the operation of attaching the polarizing film 30, the operation of winding the release film by the winding roll is performed after the operation of attaching the polarizing film 30 is completed and the clamper 221c releases the clamp of the release film 40. It may be performed at a predetermined timing.
 図4(a)~図4(c)の動作が終了すると、続いて図5に示す動作を行う。
 図5(a)はテーブル100が下降(退避)した位置から上下方向基準位置hにまで上昇した状態を示している。テーブル100が上下方向基準位置hにまで上昇すると、図5(a)に示すように、偏光フィルム30の先端部30aがガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに到達した状態となる。このようなテーブル100の上昇動作は、制御装置300によって行われる。
When the operations of FIG. 4A to FIG. 4C are finished, the operation shown in FIG. 5 is subsequently performed.
FIG. 5A shows a state where the table 100 has been raised to the vertical direction reference position h from the position where the table 100 has been lowered (retracted). When the table 100 ascends to the vertical direction reference position h, as shown in FIG. 5A, the leading end 30a of the polarizing film 30 reaches the attachment start end 10a of the glass substrate 10. Such lifting operation of the table 100 is performed by the control device 300.
 このように、制御装置300は、偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作を行う際においては、テーブル昇降制御機能によって、テーブル100を上下方向基準位置hよりも下方向に一時的に下降(退避)させるように昇降機構を制御したのちに、フィルム部材頭出し制御機能によって、偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作を行うようにフィーダー225を制御する。そして、制御装置300は、テーブル昇降制御機能によって、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作が開始するまでの所定のタイミングでテーブル100を上下方向基準位置hにまで上昇させるように昇降機構を制御する。なお、「偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作が開始するまでの所定のタイミング」としては、偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作が終了した直後又は偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作が終了するのとほぼ同じタイミングとすることが好ましい。 As described above, when the control device 300 performs the indexing operation of the polarizing film 30, the table elevating control function causes the table 100 to be temporarily lowered (retracted) below the vertical direction reference position h. After controlling the lifting and lowering mechanism, the feeder 225 is controlled to perform the feeding operation of the polarizing film 30 by the film member feeding control function. Then, the control device 300 controls the elevating mechanism so as to raise the table 100 to the vertical direction reference position h at a predetermined timing before the attachment operation of the polarizing film 30 starts by the table elevating control function. Note that “the predetermined timing until the attachment operation of the polarizing film 30 starts” is substantially the same timing as the timing when the indexing operation of the polarizing film 30 is finished or when the indexing operation of the polarizing film 30 is finished. It is preferable to do.
 このような制御を行うことによって、偏光フィルム30を高い精度で頭出しすることができ、それによって、偏光フィルム30の先端部30aを、ガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに高精度に到達させることができる。すなわち、リリースフィルム40が剥がされた偏光フィルム30には接着剤が塗布されているため、テーブル100が上下方向基準位置hにある状態で偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作を行うと、接着剤がガラス基板10に付着して偏光フィルム30の進行が妨げられてしまい、偏光フィルム30の先端部30aを、ガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに高精度に到達させることができないといった不具合が生じる可能性がある。このような不具合を防止するために、偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作を行う際においては、テーブル100を上下方向基準位置hよりも下方向に一時的に下降(退避)させた状態としている。 By performing such control, it is possible to cue the polarizing film 30 with high accuracy, thereby causing the leading end 30 a of the polarizing film 30 to reach the pasting end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 with high accuracy. Can. That is, since the adhesive is applied to the polarizing film 30 from which the release film 40 has been peeled off, the adhesive will become a glass when performing the indexing operation of the polarizing film 30 with the table 100 in the vertical direction reference position h. It adheres to the substrate 10 and the progress of the polarizing film 30 is impeded, and there may be a problem that the leading end 30a of the polarizing film 30 can not reach the bonding start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 with high accuracy. is there. In order to prevent such a defect, when performing the indexing operation of the polarizing film 30, the table 100 is temporarily lowered (retracted) below the vertical direction reference position h.
 以上のようにして、偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作(図4(c)参照。)がなされて、テーブル100が上下方向基準位置hにまで上昇すると(図5(a)参照。)、押さえロール240によって、偏光フィルム30の先端部30aをガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに押さえ付けるように押さえロール240を移動(下降)させる。これにより、押さえロール240(第1押さえロール241及び第2押さえロール242)が下降して、第1押さえロール241の押圧点Pが、偏光フィルム30の先端部30aをガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに押さえ付けた状態となる(図5(b)参照。)。これにより、偏光フィルム30がガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに位置決めされた状態となる。なお、このとき、第2押さえロール242が第1押さえロール241を押圧した状態となっている。 As described above, when the table 100 is raised to the vertical direction reference position h (see FIG. 5 (a)) after the indexing operation (see FIG. 4 (c)) of the polarizing film 30 is performed, the pressing roll is performed. By 240, the pressing roll 240 is moved (lowered) so as to press the leading end 30a of the polarizing film 30 against the bonding start end 10a of the glass substrate 10. As a result, the presser roll 240 (the first presser roll 241 and the second presser roll 242) descends, and the pressing point P of the first presser roll 241 starts to attach the tip 30a of the polarizing film 30 to the glass substrate 10. It will be in the state pressed down to 10a (refer FIG.5 (b)). As a result, the polarizing film 30 is positioned at the bonding start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10. At this time, the second pressing roll 242 is in a state of pressing the first pressing roll 241.
 この図5(b)の状態(偏光フィルム30の先端部30aをガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに押さえ付けた状態)から、テーブル100を移動させることによって、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作が行われる。すなわち、図5(b)の状態から、テーブル100がx軸に沿って矢印x’方向(図示左方向)に移動して行くことによって、偏光フィルム30がガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aを起点にして貼り付けられて行く(図5(c)参照。)。このとき、押さえロール240は偏光フィルム30を押さえ付けた状態を保持しているため、テーブル100が矢印x’方向(図示左方向)に移動して行くと、第1押さえロール241は時計方向に回転するとともに第2押さえロール242は反時計方向に回転しながら偏光フィルム30をガラス基板10に押さえ付けて行く。 By moving the table 100 from the state of FIG. 5B (the state in which the leading end 30a of the polarizing film 30 is pressed against the bonding start end 10a of the glass substrate 10), the bonding operation of the polarizing film 30 is performed It will be. That is, as the table 100 moves in the direction of the arrow x '(left direction in the drawing) along the x axis from the state of FIG. 5B, the polarizing film 30 starts from the bonding start end 10a of the glass substrate 10. And it is pasted (see Figure 5 (c)). At this time, since the holding roll 240 holds the state in which the polarizing film 30 is held, when the table 100 moves in the direction of the arrow x ′ (the left direction in the drawing), the first holding roll 241 rotates clockwise. While rotating, the second pressing roll 242 presses the polarizing film 30 against the glass substrate 10 while rotating in the counterclockwise direction.
 図5(b)から図5(c)に示すような偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作を行う際においては、貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部221が機能する。すなわち、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作を行う際においては、リリースフィルム40をテンション付与部としてのダンサーロール222と剥がし部210との間の所定位置でクランプし、当該クランプした位置と剥がし部210との間で、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作に能動的に同期させて偏光フィルム30からリリースフィルム40を剥がす動作(リリースフィルム40の剥がし動作)を行う。 When performing the attaching operation of the polarizing film 30 as shown in FIG. 5 (b) to FIG. 5 (c), the attaching / peeling synchronization mechanism part 221 functions. That is, when the polarizing film 30 is attached, the release film 40 is clamped at a predetermined position between the dancer roll 222 as a tension applying unit and the peeling unit 210, and the clamped position and the peeling unit 210 Between the polarization film 30 and the polarization film 30, and the release film 40 is peeled off from the polarization film 30 (a peeling operation of the release film 40).
 具体的には、テーブル100がx軸に沿って矢印x’方向(図示左方向)に移動して行くと、偏光フィルム(この場合、偏光フィルム30)がガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aを起点にして貼り付けられて行く。このように、テーブル100がx軸に沿って矢印x’方向(図示左方向)に移動すると、リリースフィルム40はテーブル100の移動に伴って、テーブル100の移動量と同じ移動量で剥がし部210から折り返し方向すなわちリリースフィルム進行方向(矢印x方向)に進行する。 Specifically, when the table 100 is moved along the x axis in the direction of arrow x '(left direction in the drawing), the polarizing film (in this case, the polarizing film 30) starts from the bonding start end 10a of the glass substrate 10. It will be pasted and put. As described above, when the table 100 moves in the direction of the arrow x ′ (left direction in the drawing) along the x axis, the release film 40 is moved by the same movement amount as the movement amount of the table 100 as the table 100 moves. Advance in the folding direction, that is, the release film advancing direction (arrow x direction).
 このように、貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部221は、偏光フィルム30をガラス基板10に貼り付けて行く動作(偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作)を行う際においては、クランプした位置と剥がし部210との間で、第1偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作に能動的に同期させてリリースフィルム40の剥がし動作を行う。 As described above, when performing the operation of attaching the polarizing film 30 to the glass substrate 10 (the attaching operation of the polarizing film 30), the attaching / releasing synchronization mechanism portion 221 clamps the position and the peeling portion 210 together. The release film 40 is peeled off in active synchronization with the pasting operation of the first polarizing film 30.
 貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部221の動作についてさらに説明する。貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部221は、前述したように、フィルム部材供給機構部200の側に設けられている第1折り返しロール221aと、テーブル100の側に設けられている第2折り返しロール221bと、クランパー221cとを有している。 The operation of the sticking / peeling synchronization mechanism unit 221 will be further described. As described above, the sticking / peeling synchronization mechanism unit 221 includes the first folding roll 221 a provided on the film member supply mechanism 200 side and the second folding roll 221 b provided on the table 100 side. And a clamper 221c.
 クランパー221cは、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作を行う際においては、リリースフィルム40をクランプする。このため、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作を行う際においては、クランパー221cによってリリースフィルム40をクランプした状態で、テーブル100がx軸に沿って矢印x’方向に移動すると、フィルム部材供給機構部200の側に取り付けられている第1折り返しロール221aの位置は変化せずに、テーブル100の側に取り付けられている第2折り返しロール221bが、テーブル100の移動とともに移動する。これにより、リリースフィルム40はテーブル100の移動により第2折り返しロール221bによって引っ張られて行き、リリースフィルム進行方向(矢印x方向)に進行する。 The clamper 221 c clamps the release film 40 when the polarizing film 30 is attached. Therefore, when the table 100 is moved in the direction of the arrow x 'along the x-axis while the release film 40 is clamped by the clamper 221c when the polarizing film 30 is attached, the film member supply mechanism 200 The position of the first folding roll 221a attached to the side of the table 100 does not change, and the second folding roll 221b attached to the side of the table 100 moves along with the movement of the table 100. Thereby, the release film 40 is pulled by the second folding roll 221 b by the movement of the table 100 and advances in the release film advancing direction (arrow x direction).
 このように、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作を行う際においては、リリースフィルム40がクランプされた状態となっているため、リリースフィルム40は、テンション付与部としてのダンサーロール222によるテンションから解放された状態となり、リリースフィルム40に加わるテンションはクランパー221cと剥がし部210との間のテンションのみとなり、この状態で、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作に同期してリリースフィルム40の剥がし動作が行われるため、リリースフィルム40に加わるテンションはわずかなものとなる。 As described above, when the polarizing film 30 is attached, since the release film 40 is in a clamped state, the release film 40 is released from the tension by the dancer roll 222 as a tension applying unit. In this state, the tension applied to the release film 40 is only the tension between the clamper 221c and the peeling portion 210. In this state, the peeling operation of the release film 40 is performed in synchronization with the affixing operation of the polarizing film 30, The tension applied to the release film 40 is slight.
 このため、テション付与部としてのダンサーロール222によってリリースフィルムに大きなテンションンが加わっているような構成であったとしても、リリースフィルム40は、ダンサーロール222によるテンションから解放された状態となり、リリースフィルム40にはそれほど大きなテンションは加わらないこととなる。 For this reason, even if the release film has a large tension applied to the release film by the dancer roll 222 as a tension applying unit, the release film 40 is released from the tension by the dancer roll 222, and the release film is released. The 40 will not have much tension.
 これにより、実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1によれば、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作を行う際においては、リリースフィルム40に加わるテンションを小さくすることができ、それによって、リリースフィルム40が剥がし部210の折り返し部211で擦れてしまうことによって、リリースフィルム40が破損してしまうことを抑制できる。また、フィルム部材貼り付け装置を長期間使用すると、リリースフィルムとの間の摩擦によって剥がし部210の折り返し部211も擦り減ってしまうといった問題もあるが、実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1によれば、折り返し部211の擦り減りをも抑制できる。 Thereby, according to the film member bonding apparatus 1 which concerns on embodiment, when performing the bonding operation of the polarizing film 30, the tension added to the release film 40 can be made small, and, thereby, the release film 40 It is possible to suppress breakage of the release film 40 by rubbing at the folded back portion 211 of the peeling portion 210. In addition, there is also a problem that when the film member affixing device is used for a long time, the folded portion 211 of the peeling portion 210 is also abraded away due to the friction with the release film. According to this, abrasion of the folded back portion 211 can also be suppressed.
 また、剥がし部210の折り返し部211が角部(この場合、くさび状)となっていることにより、偏光フィルム30からリリースフィルム40を剥がすときの剥がし動作(リリースフィルム40の剥がし動作)を確実に行うことができる。特に、剥がし部210の折り返し部211が例えばロールである場合に比べると、リリースフィルム40の剥がし動作をより確実に行うことができる。すなわち、折り返し部211がロールであると、偏光フィルム30からリリースフィルム40を剥がすときに、偏光フィルム30がリリースフィルム40とともにロールに巻き込まれてしまい、剥がし動作が確実に行えないといった不具合が発生する場合がある。このとき、ロールが大径であると、このような不具合の発生はより顕著なものとなる。 Further, since the folded back portion 211 of the peeling portion 210 is a corner (in this case, a wedge shape), the peeling operation (peeling operation of the release film 40) when peeling the release film 40 from the polarizing film 30 is assured. It can be carried out. In particular, the peeling operation of the release film 40 can be performed more reliably than in the case where the folded back portion 211 of the peeling portion 210 is, for example, a roll. That is, when the release film 40 is peeled off from the polarizing film 30 when the folded portion 211 is a roll, the polarizing film 30 is wound on the roll together with the release film 40, and a failure occurs such that the peeling operation can not be performed reliably. There is a case. At this time, if the diameter of the roll is large, occurrence of such a defect becomes more remarkable.
 実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1においては、上記した不具合を解消するために、剥がし部210の折り返し部211を角部としている。それによって、上記した不具合を解消することができ、確実な剥がし動作が可能となる。但し、剥がし部210の折り返し部211が角部となっていることによって、リリースフィルム40が擦り易くなってリリースフィルム40が破損し易いといった課題があるが、実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1においては、貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部221を設けることによって、このような課題を解消できる。また、リリースフィルム40が剥がし部210の折り返し部211で擦れることにより折り返し部211が擦り減り易いといった課題も解消できる。 In the film member bonding apparatus 1 which concerns on embodiment, in order to eliminate the above-mentioned malfunction, the return part 211 of the peeling part 210 is made into the corner part. As a result, the above-mentioned problems can be eliminated, and a reliable peeling operation becomes possible. However, there is a problem that the release film 40 is easily rubbed and the release film 40 is easily broken because the folded portion 211 of the peeling portion 210 is a corner portion. The film member attaching apparatus 1 according to the embodiment Such a problem can be solved by providing the sticking / peeling synchronization mechanism portion 221 in the case of FIG. Further, the problem that the folded portion 211 is easily worn away by the release film 40 being rubbed by the folded portion 211 of the peeling portion 210 can also be solved.
 なお、偏光フィルム30の頭出しを行う際は、貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部221は機能しないが、偏光フィルム30の頭出しを行う際においては、偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作を行うに必要なだけリリースフィルム40を進行させればよいため、リリースフィルム40の進行量はわずかである。このため、リリースフィルム40に加わる負荷を小さくでき、リリースフィルムを破損させたり、折り返し部211を擦り減らしたりするおそれは少ない。また、偏光フィルム30の頭出しを行う際は、リリースフィルム40はフィーダー225によってクランプされた状態となっているため、この場合も、リリースフィルム40に加わるテンション付与部(ダンサーロール222)によるテンションは解放されたものとなっている。これによっても、偏光フィルム30の頭出しを行う際は、リリースフィルム40に加わる負荷を小さくできる。 In addition, when performing the cueing of the polarizing film 30, the sticking / peeling synchronization mechanism part 221 does not function, but when performing the cueing of the polarizing film 30, it is necessary for performing the cueing operation of the polarizing film 30. Since only the release film 40 needs to be advanced, the amount of advancement of the release film 40 is small. For this reason, the load applied to the release film 40 can be reduced, and there is little possibility that the release film may be damaged or the folded portion 211 may be abraded away. In addition, since the release film 40 is clamped by the feeder 225 when the head of the polarizing film 30 is positioned, the tension by the tension applying portion (dancer roll 222) added to the release film 40 is also in this case. It has been released. This also makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the release film 40 when the polarizing film 30 is moved out.
 一方、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作を行う場合には、リリースフィルム40の進行量も多く、かつ、偏光フィルム30の先端部30aを押さえロール240で押さえた状態でリリースフィルムを剥がすため、リリースフィルム40に加わる負荷が大きくなる。特に、偏光フィルム30のサイズ(進行方向に沿ったサイズ)が大きいとリリースフィルム40の進行量が多くなり、リリースフィルム40に加わる負荷がより大きくなる。このような場合、貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部221を設けることによって、リリースフィルム40に与えるテンションを小さく抑えることができ、リリースフィルム40に与える負荷を小さくできる。それによって、リリースフィルム40の破損を抑制することができる。また、折り返し部211の擦り減りをも抑制することができる。 On the other hand, when the polarizing film 30 is attached, the advancing amount of the release film 40 is large, and the release film is peeled off in a state where the leading end 30a of the polarizing film 30 is held by the pressing roll 240. The load on 40 increases. In particular, when the size of the polarizing film 30 (size along the moving direction) is large, the advancing amount of the release film 40 increases, and the load applied to the releasing film 40 becomes larger. In such a case, by providing the sticking / peeling synchronization mechanism portion 221, the tension applied to the release film 40 can be reduced, and the load applied to the release film 40 can be reduced. Thereby, breakage of the release film 40 can be suppressed. In addition, abrasion of the folded back portion 211 can be suppressed.
 ところで、図5(c)に示すようなフィルム部材貼り付け動作が終了すると、テーブル100は初期位置に復帰するが、テーブル100が初期位置に復帰する際には、クランパー221cによるリリースフィルム40のクランプを解除する。そして、テーブル100が図5(c)に示す状態からが矢印x’方向にさらに移動すると、当該テーブル100は、図4(a)の位置(初期状態と同じ位置)に戻る。これにより、ガラス基板10(第1ガラス基板10)に対する偏光フィルム30(第1偏光フィルム30)の貼り付け工程が終了し、続いて、次のガラス基板(第2ガラス基板10とする。)に対する偏光フィルム(第2偏光フィルム30)の貼り付け工程を行う。 By the way, when the film member attaching operation as shown in FIG. 5C is finished, the table 100 returns to the initial position, but when the table 100 returns to the initial position, the clamp of the release film 40 by the clamper 221c Release Then, when the table 100 is further moved in the direction of the arrow x 'from the state shown in FIG. 5C, the table 100 returns to the position of FIG. 4A (the same position as the initial state). Thereby, the affixing process of the polarizing film 30 (the first polarizing film 30) to the glass substrate 10 (the first glass substrate 10) is completed, and subsequently, to the next glass substrate (referred to as the second glass substrate 10). A step of attaching a polarizing film (second polarizing film 30) is performed.
 第2ガラス基板10に対する第2偏光フィルム30の貼り付け工程を行うには、第1偏光フィルム30の貼り付け工程が終了した第1ガラス基板10をテーブル100から取り外して、当該テーブル100に第2ガラス基板10を載置して、図4(a)~図4(c)及び図5(a)~図5(c)の工程を行う。このような工程を繰り返すことにより、個々のガラス基板に偏光フィルムを順次貼り付けて行くことができる。 In order to perform the step of attaching the second polarizing film 30 to the second glass substrate 10, the first glass substrate 10 for which the step of attaching the first polarizing film 30 is finished is removed from the table 100, and The glass substrate 10 is placed, and the processes of FIG. 4A to FIG. 4C and FIG. 5A to FIG. 5C are performed. By repeating such a process, a polarizing film can be sequentially attached to each glass substrate.
 以上説明したように、実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1によれば、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作を行う際においては、貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部221によって、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作に能動的に同期させてリリースフィルム40の剥がし動作を行うようにしている。 As explained above, according to the film member affixing device 1 according to the embodiment, when the affixing operation of the polarizing film 30 is performed, the affixing operation of the polarizing film 30 by the affixing / peeling synchronization mechanism portion 221 And the release film 40 is peeled off.
 このため、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作を行う際においては、リリースフィルム40に加わるテンションを小さくすることができ、それによって、リリースフィルム40が剥がし部210の折り返し部211で擦れてしまうことによって、リリースフィルム40が破損してしまうことを抑制できる。また、折り返し部211の擦り減りをも抑制できる。また、剥がし部210の折り返し部211が角部となっていることにより、リリースフィルム40の剥がし動作を確実に行うことができる。 Therefore, when the polarizing film 30 is attached, the tension applied to the release film 40 can be reduced, whereby the release film 40 is rubbed by the folded portion 211 of the peeling portion 210, Damage to the release film 40 can be suppressed. In addition, abrasion of the folded portion 211 can be suppressed. In addition, since the folded back portion 211 of the peeling portion 210 is a corner portion, the peeling operation of the release film 40 can be reliably performed.
 また、剥がし部210の前方側には、偏光フィルム30の進行をガイドするガイド部材230が設けられている。当該ガイド部材230のガイド面231には、非粘着性表面加工が施されているため、偏光フィルム30接着面がガイド部材230のガイド面231に付着してしまうことを防止でき、偏光フィルム30をガイド部材230のガイド面231でスムーズに進行させることができる。 In addition, on the front side of the peeling portion 210, a guide member 230 for guiding the traveling of the polarizing film 30 is provided. Since non-adhesive surface processing is applied to the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230, the adhesion surface of the polarizing film 30 can be prevented from adhering to the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230. It can be made to advance smoothly on the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230.
 また、ガイド部材230は、当該ガイド部材先端部232がエッジとなっているため、当該ガイド部材先端部232とガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aとの間隔を可能な限り狭くすることができるとともに、ガイド部材先端部232とガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aとの間の段差を可能な限り小さくできる。 Further, since the guide member tip end portion 232 is an edge, the guide member 230 can make the distance between the guide member tip end portion 232 and the attachment start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 as narrow as possible. The level difference between the guide member tip end portion 232 and the adhesion start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 can be made as small as possible.
 これにより、偏光フィルム30の先端部30aがガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに到達するまでの距離を短くすることができ、偏光フィルム30が貼り付け始端10aに到達するまでの間において、自重によって撓んでしまうといったことを防止できる。それによって、ガイド面231を進行する偏光フィルム30の先端部30aをガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに高い精度で到達させることができる。 Thereby, the distance until the leading end 30a of the polarizing film 30 reaches the attachment start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 can be shortened, and the self-weight is caused by the time the polarization film 30 reaches the attachment start end 10a. It can prevent that it bends. As a result, the leading end 30 a of the polarizing film 30 traveling on the guide surface 231 can be made to reach the bonding start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 with high accuracy.
 また、ガイド部材230は、当該ガイド面231の延長上にガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aが位置するように設置されているため、これによっても、ガイド面231を進行する偏光フィルム30の先端部30aをガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに高い精度で到達させることができる。 Moreover, since the guide member 230 is installed so that the adhesion start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 is positioned on the extension of the guide surface 231, the tip end of the polarizing film 30 traveling on the guide surface 231 is also thereby 30a can be made to reach the bonding start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 with high accuracy.
 また、ガイド部材230は、ステンレス鋼などの金属によって形成されており、当該ガイド部材230のガイド面231には、導電性かつ非粘着性表面加工が施されており、当該ガイド面231は電気的に接地(アース)されている。このため、偏光フィルム30に静電気が帯電した場合であっても、偏光フィルム30に帯電した静電気を除去できる。この観点でいえば、ガイド部材230は、静電気除去部材ともいえる。このように、ガイド部材230が静電気除去部材であることにより、偏光フィルム30に埃やゴミなどが付着しにくくなるとともに、偏光フィルム30を被貼り付け部材としてのガラス基板10に貼り付ける動作を行う際に、高い精度でフィルム部材をガラス基板10に貼り付けることができる。また、偏光フィルム30が貼り付けられたガラス基板10を次の工程に送る際に、静電気が帯電したままの状態で次の工程に送られてしまうことを防ぐことができる。 Further, the guide member 230 is formed of metal such as stainless steel, and the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230 is subjected to electroconductive and non-adhesive surface processing, and the guide surface 231 is electrically Is grounded (earthed). Therefore, even when static electricity is charged on the polarizing film 30, the static electricity charged on the polarizing film 30 can be removed. In this respect, the guide member 230 can be said to be a static electricity removing member. As described above, since the guide member 230 is the static electricity removing member, dust and dirt do not easily adhere to the polarizing film 30, and the polarizing film 30 is attached to the glass substrate 10 as the affixing member. At the time, the film member can be attached to the glass substrate 10 with high accuracy. In addition, when the glass substrate 10 to which the polarizing film 30 is attached is sent to the next process, it is possible to prevent the static electricity from being sent to the next process while being charged.
 また、偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作を行う際においては、テーブル100を上下方向基準位置hよりも下方向に一時的に退避させた状態とし、第1偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作が終了した直後のタイミング又は第1偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作が終了するのとほぼ同じタイミングで、テーブル100を上下方向基準位置hに復帰させるようにしている。これにより、偏光フィルム30を高い精度で頭出しすることができる。 In addition, when performing the indexing operation of the polarizing film 30, the table 100 is temporarily retracted below the reference position h in the vertical direction, and immediately after the indexing operation of the first polarizing film 30 is finished. The table 100 is returned to the vertical direction reference position h at substantially the same timing as the timing at which the first polarizing film 30 ends the cueing operation. Thereby, it is possible to cue the polarizing film 30 with high accuracy.
 また、押さえロール240は、偏光フィルム30に接触する側に位置する小径の第1押さえロール241と当該第1押さえロール241の押圧力をバックアップするための大径の第2押さえロール242によって構成されている。 Further, the presser roll 240 is configured by a small diameter first presser roll 241 located on the side contacting the polarizing film 30, and a large diameter second presser roll 242 for backing up the pressing force of the first presser roll 241. ing.
 押さえロール240がこのような構成となっていることにより、ガイド部材先端部232とガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aとの間隔が狭くても、第1押さえロール241が小径であることからガイド部材230に接触することなく、偏光フィルム30を押さえ付けることができる。また、第2押さえロール242が第1押さえロール241の反りを防ぐ役目もなすことから、偏光フィルム30を幅方向(押さえロール240の回転軸に沿った方向)全体に渡って均一な押圧力で確実に押さえ付けることができる。 Since the pressing roll 240 has such a configuration, the first pressing roll 241 has a small diameter even if the distance between the guide member tip end portion 232 and the attachment start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 is narrow, the guide member The polarizing film 30 can be pressed without coming into contact with 230. Further, since the second pressing roll 242 also serves to prevent the warping of the first pressing roll 241, the polarizing film 30 can be applied with a uniform pressing force over the entire width direction (direction along the rotation axis of the pressing roll 240). We can hold down surely.
 なお、本発明は上述の実施形態に限られるものではなく、本発明の要旨を逸脱しない範囲で種々変形実施可能となるものである。たとえば、下記に示すような変形実施も可能である。 The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, a modified implementation as shown below is also possible.
 (1)上記実施形態においては、第1押さえロールの径を10mm程度とした場合を例示したが、第1押さえロールの径は必ずしも10mm程度とする必要はなく、ガイド部材先端部232とガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aとの間隔dなどに応じて最適な径とすることができる。 (1) In the above embodiment, although the case where the diameter of the first pressing roll is about 10 mm is exemplified, the diameter of the first pressing roll does not necessarily have to be about 10 mm, and the guide member tip portion 232 and the glass substrate The diameter can be optimized according to the distance d to the pasting start end 10a 10 and the like.
 (2)上記実施形態においては、ガイド部材230は、3角形のブロック状のものを採用した場合を例示したが、ガイド部材230の形状は限定されるものではなく、リリースフィルム40が剥がされた偏光フィルム30の先端部30aが、テーブル100に載置されたガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに向かって進行させることができればよく、例えば板状であってもよい。 (2) In the above embodiment, the case where the guide member 230 adopts a triangular block shape is exemplified, but the shape of the guide member 230 is not limited, and the release film 40 is peeled off. The front end portion 30 a of the polarizing film 30 may be made to advance toward the bonding start end 10 a of the glass substrate 10 placed on the table 100, and may be, for example, a plate shape.
 図6は、ガイド部材230を板状とした場合を説明するために示す図である。なお、図6は図3(a)に対応するものであり、ガイド部材230材を板状とした点が異なるだけであり、その他の構成要素は図3と同じであるため、同一構成要素には同一符号が付されている。ガイド部材230を板状とした場合においても、ガイド部材先端部232は、図6に示すようにエッジとなっていることが好ましい。 FIG. 6 is a figure shown in order to demonstrate the case where the guide member 230 is made into plate shape. 6 corresponds to FIG. 3 (a), except that the guide member 230 is plate-shaped, and the other components are the same as those in FIG. The same symbol is attached. Even when the guide member 230 has a plate shape, it is preferable that the guide member distal end portion 232 has an edge as shown in FIG.
 このようにすることで、偏光フィルム30の先端部30aをガラス基板10の貼り付け始端10aに高い精度で到達させることができる。なお、ガイド部材230を板状とした場合であっても、当該板状のガイド部材230のガイド面231は、導電性を有する非粘着性表面加工が施されており、当該ガイド面231は電気的に接地されている。これにより、実施形態に係るフィルム部材貼り付け装置1で使用したガイド部材230と同様の静電気対策が可能となる。また、ガイド部材230は、図6に示すような厚みを有する板状ではなく、板厚が例えば1mmから数mm程度の薄板状部材を用いてもよく、このような薄板部材であれば、ガイド部材先端部232は、おのずからエッジとなる。 By doing so, the leading end 30a of the polarizing film 30 can be made to reach the bonding start end 10a of the glass substrate 10 with high accuracy. Even when the guide member 230 has a plate shape, the guide surface 231 of the plate-like guide member 230 is subjected to non-adhesive surface processing having conductivity, and the guide surface 231 is electrically Is grounded. Thereby, the same countermeasure against static electricity as the guide member 230 used in the film member bonding apparatus 1 according to the embodiment can be achieved. Further, the guide member 230 may not be a plate having a thickness as shown in FIG. 6, and a thin plate member having a plate thickness of, for example, about 1 mm to several mm may be used. The member tip end portion 232 naturally becomes an edge.
 (3)上記実施形態においては、図4に示す偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作を行う際には、フィルム部材供給機構部200を固定とし、テーブル100をx軸に沿って往復移動させる場合を例示したが、テーブル100を固定し、フィルム部材供給機構部200を往復動させるようにしてもよい。 (3) In the above embodiment, when performing the attaching operation of the polarizing film 30 shown in FIG. 4, the film member supply mechanism unit 200 is fixed, and the case where the table 100 is reciprocated along the x axis is illustrated. However, the table 100 may be fixed and the film member supply mechanism 200 may be reciprocated.
 具体的には、図4(a)の初期状態と同様にテーブル100にガラス基板10を載置した状態で、当該テーブル100の位置を固定しておく。そして、フィルム部材供給機構部200を図4における矢印x’方向(図示左方向に)に移動させて、図4(b)とほぼ同様の状態として、図4(c)及び図5(a)~図5(c)の工程を行う。この場合、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作を行う際には、テーブル100を固定として、フィルム部材供給機構部200を矢印x方向に移動させる。このような動作を行うことによっても、上記実施形態と同様に偏光フィルム30をガラス基板10に貼り付けて行くことができる。 Specifically, the position of the table 100 is fixed in a state where the glass substrate 10 is placed on the table 100 as in the initial state of FIG. 4A. Then, the film member supply mechanism unit 200 is moved in the direction of the arrow x 'in FIG. 4 (in the left direction in the figure), and the state is substantially the same as FIG. Perform the process of FIG. 5 (c). In this case, when the polarizing film 30 is attached, the film member supply mechanism 200 is moved in the arrow x direction with the table 100 fixed. Also by performing such an operation, it is possible to stick the polarizing film 30 to the glass substrate 10 as in the above embodiment.
 また、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作は、テーブル100をx軸に沿って往復移動させる動作と、フィルム部材供給機構部200をx軸に沿って往復移動させる動作とを併用してもよい。このような動作を行うことによっても、上記実施形態と同様に偏光フィルム30をガラス基板10に貼り付けて行くことができる。この場合、貼り付け動作をより高速化できるといった効果も得られる。 Further, the attaching operation of the polarizing film 30 may be performed by combining the operation of reciprocating the table 100 along the x-axis and the operation of reciprocating the film member supply mechanism 200 along the x-axis. Also by performing such an operation, it is possible to stick the polarizing film 30 to the glass substrate 10 as in the above embodiment. In this case, it is also possible to obtain an effect of speeding up the attaching operation.
 なお、テーブル100を固定して、フィルム部材供給機構部200を往復動させる場合においても、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作を行う際においては、貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部221を機能させることができる。この場合、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作を行う際においては、フィルム部材供給機構部200が矢印x方向に移動するが、このとき、第1折り返しロール221aもフィルム部材供給機構部200の移動とともに移動するが、テーブル100の側に設けられている第2折り返しロール221bの位置は変化しない。 Even when the film member supply mechanism 200 is reciprocated while the table 100 is fixed, the affixing / peeling synchronization mechanism 221 can function when performing the affixing operation of the polarizing film 30. . In this case, when the polarizing film 30 is attached, the film member supply mechanism 200 moves in the direction of the arrow x. At this time, the first folding roll 221a also moves along with the movement of the film member supply mechanism 200. However, the position of the second folding roll 221b provided on the side of the table 100 does not change.
 このため、リリースフィルム40はフィルム部材供給機構部200の移動とともに第1折り返しロール221aによって引っ張られて、偏光フィルム30からリリースフィルム40が剥がされて行きながら偏光フィルム30が進行して行く。この場合においても、クランパー221ccによってリリースフィルム40をクランプした状態で、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作に能動的に同期してリリースフィルム40の剥がし動作が行われることとなるため、偏光フィルム30からリリースフィルム40を剥がす際に、リリースフィルムに加わるテンション(張力)を小さくすることができる。 Therefore, the release film 40 is pulled by the first folding roll 221a with the movement of the film member supply mechanism 200, and the polarizing film 30 advances while the release film 40 is peeled off from the polarizing film 30. Also in this case, in a state where the release film 40 is clamped by the clamper 221 cc, the release operation of the release film 40 is performed in active synchronization with the affixing operation of the polarizing film 30. When the film 40 is peeled off, the tension applied to the release film can be reduced.
 また、テーブル100をx軸に沿って往復移動させる動作と、フィルム部材供給機構部200をx軸に沿って往復移動させる動作とを併用した場合にも、貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部を機能させることができる。 Also, when the operation to reciprocate the table 100 along the x axis and the operation to reciprocate the film member supply mechanism 200 along the x axis are used together, the sticking / peeling synchronization mechanism is functioned be able to.
 (4)制御装置300によるフィーダー225に対する制御の他の例としては、偏光フィルム30の後端部30bの位置を監視し、当該偏光フィルム30の後端部30bの位置が、偏光フィルム30の後端部30bが目標とする移動量(目標移動量という。)だけ移動するまで、リリースフィルム40をリリースフィルム進行方向に進行させるというような制御としてもよい。これにより、偏光フィルム30の先端部30aを第1押さえロール241の押圧点Pに高い精度で到達させることができる。このような制御は、偏光フィルム30の後端部30bが所定位置からどれだけ移動させると当該偏光フィルム30の先端部30aが第1押さえロール241の押圧点Pに達するかを目標移動量として予め求めておくことにより、実施可能である。 (4) As another example of control on the feeder 225 by the control device 300, the position of the rear end 30b of the polarizing film 30 is monitored, and the position of the rear end 30b of the polarizing film 30 is behind the polarizing film 30. The release film 40 may be controlled to advance in the release film advancing direction until the end 30 b moves by a target movement amount (referred to as a target movement amount). Thus, the leading end 30 a of the polarizing film 30 can reach the pressing point P of the first pressing roll 241 with high accuracy. Such control is performed in advance by using as a target movement amount whether the front end 30a of the polarizing film 30 reaches the pressing point P of the first pressing roll 241 when the rear end 30b of the polarizing film 30 is moved from a predetermined position. It can be implemented by asking for it.
 (5)上記実施形態においては、剥がし部は、先端折り返し部の角部がくさび状(鋭角)である場合を例示したが、くさび状(鋭角)であるあることに限定されるものではなく、例えば、ほぼ直角の角部であってもよい。 (5) In the said embodiment, although the case where the corner | angular part of a front-end | tip folding part was wedge shape (sharp angle) was illustrated in a peeling part, it is not limited to being wedge shape (sharp angle), For example, the corner may be substantially at a right angle.
 (6)上記実施形態においては、偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作を行う際において、テーブル100を下降(退避)させる動作は、図4(b)の位置に移動したときに当該テーブル100を退避させるようにしたが、図4(a)の初期状態の段階でテーブル100を下降(退避)させた状態として、図4(b)の位置に移動させるようにしてもよい。 (6) In the embodiment described above, when performing the indexing operation of the polarizing film 30, the operation of lowering (retracting) the table 100 retracts the table 100 when it is moved to the position of FIG. However, the table 100 may be moved to the position shown in FIG. 4 (b) with the table 100 lowered (retracted) at the stage of the initial state shown in FIG. 4 (a).
 (7)上記実施形態においては、液晶パネルに用いられる2枚のガラス基板(液晶層の表面側に設けられるガラス基板及び裏面側に設けられるガラス基板)のうちの一方の面に用いるガラス基板に偏光フィルムを貼付する場合について説明したが、他方の面に用いるガラス基板に偏光フィルムを貼付する場合もほぼ同様に実施できる。 (7) In the above embodiment, the glass substrate used for one of the two glass substrates used in the liquid crystal panel (the glass substrate provided on the front side of the liquid crystal layer and the glass substrate provided on the back side) Although the case where the polarizing film is attached is described, the case where the polarizing film is attached to the glass substrate used on the other side can be substantially the same.
 (8)上記実施形態においては、フィルム部材は、液晶パネルに用いられる偏光フィルムであるとし、被貼り付け部材は、液晶パネルに用いられるガラス基板であるとして、当該ガラス基板に偏光フィルムを貼り付けるためのフィルム部材貼り付け装置について説明したが、フィルム部材貼り付け装置としては、上記実施形態において説明したフィルム部材貼り付け装置に限られるものではなく、フィルム部材を被貼り付け部材に貼り付ける装置に広く適用できる。 (8) In the above embodiment, the film member is a polarizing film used for a liquid crystal panel, and the affixing member is a glass substrate used for a liquid crystal panel, and the polarizing film is attached to the glass substrate Although the film member affixing device for this purpose has been described, the film member affixing device is not limited to the film member affixing device described in the above embodiment, and an apparatus for affixing the film member to the affixing member It is widely applicable.
 (9)上記実施形態においては、フィルム部材は長方形状としたが、フィルム部材の形状は長方形に限られるものではなく、正方形であってもよく、また、長方形及び正方形(矩形)に限られるものではない。 (9) In the above embodiment, the film member has a rectangular shape, but the shape of the film member is not limited to a rectangular shape, and may be a square, or may be a rectangle and a square (rectangle) is not.
 (10)上記実施形態においては、第1押さえロール241及び第2押さえロール242は、第1押さえロール241を第2押さえロール242に比べて小径としたが、第2押さえロール242がバックアップロールとして機能できれば、第1押さえロール241及び第2押さえロール242を同じ径としてもよい。 (10) In the above embodiment, although the first presser roll 241 and the second presser roll 242 have the first presser roll 241 having a smaller diameter than the second presser roll 242, the second presser roll 242 is used as a backup roll. As long as the function is possible, the first holding roll 241 and the second holding roll 242 may have the same diameter.
 (11)上記実施形態においては、押さえロール240は、2個の押さえロールを2段重ねした構成とした場合を例示したが、2個に限られるものではなく、3個以上の押さえロールを重ねた構成としてもよい。 (11) In the above embodiment, the pressure roller 240 has a configuration in which two pressure rollers are stacked in two stages. However, the present invention is not limited to two, and three or more pressure rollers may be overlapped. It is good also as composition.
 (12)上記実施形態においては、ガイド部材230のガイド面231は、ガイド部材230、支持部材(図示せず。)及びステージ50を介して電気的に接地(アース)するようにしたが、当該ガイド面231又はガイド部材230に接地(アース)用のリード線を接続して当該ガイド部材を直接的に接地(アース)するようにしてもよい。 (12) In the above embodiment, the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230 is electrically grounded via the guide member 230, the support member (not shown), and the stage 50. A lead wire for grounding may be connected to the guide surface 231 or the guide member 230 to directly ground the guide member.
 (13)上記実施形態においては、フィルム部材としては、液晶パネルに用いられる偏光フィルムとしたが、本発明はこれに限られるものではない。例えば、フィルム部材は、液晶パネルに用いられる保護フィルムであってもよく、また、電子機器に用いられる電磁波シールドフィルムであってもよい。また、上記実施形態においては、被貼り付け部材は、液晶パネルに用いられるガラス基板としたが、本発明はこれに限られるものではない。例えば、液晶パネルに用いられる合成樹脂基板(合成樹脂フィルムも含む。)であってもよい。また、液晶パネル以外(例えば、有機ELパネル又はその他のディスプレイ)に用いられるガラス基板や合成樹脂基板(合成樹脂フィルムも含む。)であってもよい。また、ディスプレイ以外(例えば、電子機器など)に用いられる電子回路基板であってもよい。 (13) In the said embodiment, although it was set as the polarizing film used for a liquid crystal panel as a film member, this invention is not limited to this. For example, the film member may be a protective film used for a liquid crystal panel, or may be an electromagnetic wave shielding film used for an electronic device. Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the to-be-adhered member was used as the glass substrate used for a liquid crystal panel, this invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be a synthetic resin substrate (including a synthetic resin film) used for a liquid crystal panel. Further, it may be a glass substrate or a synthetic resin substrate (including a synthetic resin film) used for other than the liquid crystal panel (for example, an organic EL panel or other display). Moreover, the electronic circuit board used for things other than a display (for example, an electronic device etc.) may be used.
 (14)上記実施形態においては、ガイド部材230のガイド面231に、導電性を有する非粘着性表面加工を施すための処理として、「トシカル(登録商標)Sコーティング加工」と呼ばれる表面加工の技術を採用し、そのようなコーティング加工を、トシカル(登録商標)S、UNA―300シリーズ(UNA―310-X10)、UNA―800シリーズ、TS-1000シリーズ、TS-1080シリーズ、TS-1310シリーズのものを好適に用いることができるとしたが、本発明はこれに限られるものではない。また、トシカル(登録商標)Sのコーティング被膜の膜厚は、例えば、1μm~200μm、好ましくは3μm~150μmのものを好適に用いることができるとしたが、本発明はこれに限られるものではない。また、トシカル(登録商標)Sのコーティング被膜を形成する前に、ガイド部材230のガイド面231に凹凸構造を形成しておいてもよい。この場合の凹凸構造の平均表面粗さとしては、2μm~15μmのものを好適に用いることができるとしたが、本発明はこれに限られるものではない。 (14) In the above embodiment, as a process for applying conductive non-adhesive surface processing to the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230, a technology for surface processing called "Toshikal (registered trademark) S coating processing" To adopt such a coating process, Toshikal (registered trademark) S, UNA-300 series (UNA-310-X10), UNA-800 series, TS-1000 series, TS-1080 series, TS-1310 series Although it is possible to preferably use ones, the present invention is not limited thereto. The film thickness of the coating film of Toshikal (registered trademark) S is, for example, preferably 1 μm to 200 μm, and preferably 3 μm to 150 μm, but the present invention is not limited to this. . Moreover, before forming the coating film of Toshikal (registered trademark) S, a concavo-convex structure may be formed on the guide surface 231 of the guide member 230. The average surface roughness of the concavo-convex structure in this case is preferably 2 μm to 15 μm, but the present invention is not limited to this.
 (15)上記実施形態においては、貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部221が、偏光フィルム30の貼り付け動作に能動的に同期させてリリースフィルムの剥がし動作を行う際に、当該貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部221にクランパー221cを設けて、当該クランパー221cによってリリースフィルム40をクランプするようにしたが、当該クランパー221cを設けずに、当該フィーダー225のクランパー226を、偏光フィルム30の頭出し動作用としてだけでなく、貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部221における貼り付け/剥がし同期動作用としても用いることも可能である。この場合、貼り付け/剥がし同期動作を行う際には、当該フィーダー225のクランパー226によってリリースフィルム40をクランプする。このようにしても、リリースフィルム40はテンション付与部としてのダンサーロール222によるテンションから解放された状態となり、リリースフィルム40に加わるテンションを小さくできる。 (15) In the above embodiment, when the affixing / peeling synchronization mechanism section 221 actively synchronizes with the affixing operation of the polarizing film 30 to perform the peeling operation of the release film, the affixing / peeling synchronization mechanism Although the clamper 221c is provided in the part 221 and the release film 40 is clamped by the clamper 221c, the clamper 226 of the feeder 225 is only used for the indexing operation of the polarizing film 30 without providing the clamper 221c. Instead, it is also possible to use for paste / peel synchronization operation in the paste / peel synchronization mechanism unit 221. In this case, the release film 40 is clamped by the clamper 226 of the feeder 225 when performing the sticking / peeling synchronization operation. Even in this case, the release film 40 is released from the tension by the dancer roll 222 as a tension applying unit, and the tension applied to the release film 40 can be reduced.
 1・・・フィルム部材貼り付け装置、10・・・ガラス基板(被貼り付け部材)、10a・・・貼り付け始端、30・・・偏光フィルム(フィルム部材)、30a・・・先端部(進行方向先端部)、30b・・・後端部(進行方向後端部)、31・・・接着剤、40・・・リリースフィルム、50・・・ステージ、60・・・ガイドレール、100・・・テーブル、110・・・スライダー、120・・・テーブル本体部、200・・・フィルム部材供給機構部、210・・・剥がし部、211・・・折り返し部、220・・・リリースフィルム進行機構部、221・・・剥がし/貼り付け同期機構部、221a・・・第1折り返しロール、221b・・・第2折り返しロール、221c・・・クランパー、222・・・ダンサーロール(テンション付与部)、225・・・フィーダー、226・・・クランパー(フィーダー225のクランパー)、230・・・ガイド部材、231・・・ガイド面、232・・・ガイド部材先端部(ガイド部材の先端部)、240・・・押さえロール、241・・・第1押さえロール、242・・・第2押さえロール、250・・・カメラ、300・・制御装置、C1,C2,・・・切れ目、h・・・上下方向基準位置、P・・・押圧点 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Film member affixing apparatus, 10 ... Glass substrate (member to be affixed), 10a ... Affixing start end, 30 ... Polarization film (film member), 30a ... Tip part (progress Direction end portion), 30b ··· Rear end portion (advancing direction rear end portion), 31 ··· Adhesive, 40 · · · Release film, 50 · · · Stage, 60 · · · Guide rail, 100 · · · Table 110 Slider 120 Table body 200 Film member supply mechanism 210 Peeling portion 211 Folded portion 220 Release film advancing mechanism , 221: peeling / pasting synchronization mechanism, 221a: first folding roll, 221b: second folding roll, 221c: clamper, 222: dancer roll ( Position application portion, 225: feeder, 226: clamper (a clamper of feeder 225) 230: guide member 231: guide surface 232: guide member tip (tip of guide member) Part), 240: holding roll, 241: first holding roll, 242: second holding roll, 250: camera, 300: control device, C1, C2,. ... Vertical reference position, P ... Press point

Claims (15)

  1.  一方の面が接着面となっており、当該接着面にリリースフィルムが剥離可能に貼付されているフィルム部材から前記リリースフィルムを剥がしながら前記フィルム部材を進行させて行き、前記リリースフィルムが剥がされた前記フィルム部材の進行方向先端部を、被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端に到達させるための「フィルム部材の頭出し動作」を行った後に、前記フィルム部材の進行方向先端部を前記被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端に押さえ付けた状態で前記貼り付け始端を起点に前記リリースフィルムを剥がしながら前記フィルム部材を前記被貼り付け部材に貼り付けて行く「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」を行うフィルム部材貼り付け装置であって、
     前記被貼り付け部材を載置するテーブルと、
     前記フィルム部材を供給するフィルム部材供給機構部と、
     前記「フィルム部材の頭出し動作」を行うために前記フィルム部材供給機構部を制御するフィルム部材頭出し制御機能と、前記「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」を行うために前記フィルム部材供給機構部及び前記テーブルの少なくとも一方を相対的に移動させる貼り付け制御機能とを有する制御装置と、
     を備え、
     前記フィルム部材供給機構部は、
     前記リリースフィルムを前記フィルム部材の進行方向とはほぼ反対方向に折り返す折り返し部を有し、当該折り返し部で前記リリースフィルムを折り返した状態で前記フィルム部材供給機構部及び前記テーブルの少なくとも一方が相対的に移動することによって前記フィルム部材から前記リリースフィルムを剥がす剥がし部と、
     前記折り返し部で折り返された前記リリースフィルムを進行させるリリースフィルム進行機構部と、
     を有し、
     前記リリースフィルム進行機構部には、
     前記折り返された前記リリースフィルムに対して前記リリースフィルムが進行する方向に沿ったテンションを付与するテンション付与部と、
     当該テンション付与部と前記剥がし部との間に配置され、前記「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」を行う際においては、前記リリースフィルムを前記テンション付与部と前記剥がし部との間の所定位置でクランプし、当該クランプした位置と前記剥がし部との間で、前記「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」に能動的に同期させて前記フィルム部材から前記リリースフィルムを剥がす動作を行う貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部と、
     が設けられていることを特徴とするフィルム部材貼り付け装置。
    One surface is an adhesive surface, and the film member is advanced while peeling off the release film from the film member to which the release film is peelably attached to the adhesive surface, and the release film is peeled off After performing the "heading operation of the film member" for causing the forward end of the film member to reach the attachment start end of the affixing member, the forward end of the film member is the affixing member A film member pasting the film member pasting the film member onto the member to be affixed while peeling off the release film starting from the pasting start end in a state of being pressed to the pasting start end of the film member pasting the film member Device, and
    A table on which the affixing member is placed;
    A film member supply mechanism for supplying the film member;
    A film member indexing control function for controlling the film member feeding mechanism unit to perform the film member indexing operation, and the film member feeding mechanism unit to perform the film member attaching operation; A control device having a sticking control function of relatively moving at least one of the tables;
    Equipped with
    The film member supply mechanism unit
    It has a folded back portion that folds back the release film in a direction substantially opposite to the traveling direction of the film member, and in a state where the release film is folded back at the folded back portion, at least one of the film member supply mechanism and the table is relatively A peeling section which peels the release film from the film member by moving to the
    A release film advancing mechanism that advances the release film folded back at the folded back portion;
    Have
    The release film advancing mechanism unit
    A tension applying section for applying a tension along the direction in which the release film advances to the release film that has been folded back;
    The release film is disposed between the tension applying portion and the peeling portion, and the release film is clamped at a predetermined position between the tension applying portion and the peeling portion when performing the “pasting operation of the film member”. Between the clamped position and the peeling portion, the sticking / peeling synchronization mechanism portion performing an operation of peeling the release film from the film member in active synchronization with the “sticking operation of the film member”. When,
    The film member affixing device characterized by being provided.
  2.  請求項1に記載のフィルム部材貼り付け装置において、
     前記貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部は、
     前記テンション付与部と前記剥がし部との間の所定位置に設けられ、前記リリースフィルムを前記テンション付与部と前記剥がし部との間の所定位置でクランプするクランパーと、
     前記クランパーと前記剥がし部との間に位置し、かつ、前記フィルム部材供給機構部の側に取り付けられており、前記剥がし部で剥がされたリリースフィルムを前記フィルム部材の進行方向とほぼ同方向に進行させるように折り返す第1折り返しロールと、
     前記クランパーと前記第1折り返しロールとの間に位置し、かつ、前記テーブルの側に取り付けられており、前記第1折り返しロールで折り返されたリリースフィルムを前記フィルム部材の進行方向とほぼ反対方向に進行させるように折り返す第2折り返しロールと、
     を有することを特徴とするフィルム部材貼り付け装置。
    In the film member affixing device according to claim 1,
    The pasting / peeling synchronization mechanism unit
    A clamper provided at a predetermined position between the tension applying unit and the peeling unit and clamping the release film at a predetermined position between the tension applying unit and the peeling unit;
    The release film is located between the clamper and the peeling portion and attached to the side of the film member supply mechanism, and the release film peeled off at the peeling portion is substantially in the same direction as the traveling direction of the film member. The first folding roll that is folded back to advance
    The release film is located between the clamper and the first folding roll and attached to the side of the table, and the release film folded back by the first folding roll is in a direction substantially opposite to the traveling direction of the film member. A second folding roll which is folded back to advance
    An apparatus for attaching a film member, comprising:
  3.  請求項1又は2に記載のフィルム部材貼り付け装置において、
     前記テーブルには、当該テーブルを上下方向に昇降させるための昇降機構が設けられており、
     前記「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」を行う際の前記テーブルの上下方向の位置を上下方向基準位置としたとき、
     前記制御装置は、前記「フィルム部材の頭出し動作」を行う際においては、前記テーブルを前記上下方向基準位置よりも下方向に一時的に下降させるように前記昇降機構を制御して、前記フィルム部材頭出し制御機能によって前記「フィルム部材の頭出し動作」を行い、前記フィルム部材の貼り付け動作が開始するまでの所定のタイミングで前記テーブルを前記上下方向基準位置にまで上昇させるように前記昇降機構を制御するテーブル昇降制御機能をさらに有することを特徴とするフィルム部材貼り付け装置。
    In the film member affixing device according to claim 1 or 2,
    The table is provided with a lift mechanism for moving the table up and down.
    When the vertical position of the table at the time of performing the “film member pasting operation” is the vertical reference position,
    The control device controls the elevating mechanism to lower the table temporarily below the reference position in the vertical direction when performing the "heading operation of the film member", thereby controlling the film The elevating operation is performed so as to raise the table to the vertical reference position at a predetermined timing before the "film member indexing operation" is performed by the member indexing control function and the film member attaching operation is started. A film member affixing device characterized by further having a table elevation control function for controlling a mechanism.
  4.  請求項1~3のいずれかに記載のフィルム部材貼り付け装置において、
     前記剥がし部の前記折り返し部は角部となっていることを特徴とするフィルム部材貼り付け装置。
    In the film member affixing device according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
    The film member attaching apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the folded back portion of the peeling portion is a corner portion.
  5.  請求項1~4のいずれかに記載のフィルム部材貼り付け装置において、
     前記貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部と前記テンション付与部との間には、前記「フィルム部材の頭出し動作」を行わせるためのフィーダーが設けられていることを特徴とするフィルム部材貼り付け装置。
    In the film member affixing device according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
    A film member affixing device characterized in that a feeder for performing the "heading operation of film member" is provided between the affixing / peeling synchronization mechanism portion and the tension applying portion.
  6.  請求項5に記載のフィルム部材貼り付け装置において、
     前記フィルム部材供給機構部は、前記フィルム部材の所定部分を撮像可能に設置されたカメラをさらに有し、
     前記制御装置は、
     前記カメラからの撮影データに基づいて前記フィルム部材の前記所定部分の位置を監視して、前記「フィルム部材の頭出し動作」を行うように前記フィーダーを制御するフィーダー制御機能をさらに有することを特徴とするフィルム部材貼り付け装置。
    In the film member affixing device according to claim 5,
    The film member supply mechanism further includes a camera installed so as to be able to image a predetermined portion of the film member,
    The controller is
    It further has a feeder control function of controlling the feeder so as to monitor the position of the predetermined portion of the film member based on shooting data from the camera and perform the "heading operation of the film member". Film member affixing device to be.
  7.  請求項6に記載のフィルム部材貼り付け装置において、
     前記フィルム部材の所定部分は、当該フィルム部材の進行方向後端部であることを特徴とするフィルム部材貼り付け装置。
    In the film member affixing device according to claim 6,
    The film member affixing device according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined portion of the film member is a rear end portion in the traveling direction of the film member.
  8.  請求項1~7のいずれかに記載のフィルム部材貼り付け装置において、
     前記フィルム部材供給機構部は、
     前記剥がし部によってリリースフィルムが剥がされた前記フィルム部材の進行をガイドするガイド面が存在し当該ガイド面には接着剤の付着を防ぐ非粘着性表面加工が施されているガイド部材をさらに有し、
     前記ガイド部材は、当該ガイド部材の先端部がエッジとなっているとともに、前記ガイド面が前記被貼り付け部材に対して鋭角をなし、かつ、当該ガイド面の延長上に前記被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端が位置するように設置されていることを特徴とするフィルム部材貼り付け装置。
    In the film member affixing device according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
    The film member supply mechanism unit
    There is a guide surface for guiding the progress of the film member from which the release film has been peeled off by the peeling portion, and the guide surface further has a guide member having a non-adhesive surface treatment to prevent adhesion of the adhesive. ,
    In the guide member, the tip end portion of the guide member is an edge, the guide surface forms an acute angle with the affixing member, and the affixing member of the affixing member is an extension of the guide surface. A film member affixing device characterized in that the affixing start end is positioned.
  9.  請求項8に記載のフィルム部材貼り付け装置において、
     前記ガイド面は、導電性を有するとともに電気的に接地されていることを特徴とするフィルム部材貼り付け装置。
    In the film member affixing device according to claim 8,
    The said guide surface is electrically conductive and electrically grounded, The film member affixing device characterized by the above-mentioned.
  10.  請求項1~9のいずれかに記載のフィルム部材貼り付け装置において、
     前記フィルム部材供給機構部は、
     前記フィルム部材の進行方向先端部を前記被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端に押さえるための押さえロールをさらに有し、
     前記押さえロールは、複数個の押さえロールが複数段に重ねられた構成となっていて、当該複数個の押さえロールのそれぞれの回転軸が、前記フィルム部材の進行方向先端部の辺に沿う方向となるように設置されていることを特徴とするフィルム部材貼り付け装置。
    In the film member affixing device according to any one of claims 1 to 9,
    The film member supply mechanism unit
    It further has a pressing roll for pressing the forward end of the film member in the advancing direction to the affixing start end of the affixing member,
    The holding roll has a configuration in which a plurality of holding rolls are stacked in a plurality of stages, and a rotation axis of each of the plurality of holding rolls is a direction along a side of a leading end of the film member. The film member affixing device characterized in that it is installed as follows.
  11.  請求項10に記載のフィルム部材貼り付け装置において、
     前記複数個の押さえロールのうち、前記フィルム部材に接触する側に位置する押さえロールの径は、他の押さえロールの径よりも小径に設定されていることを特徴とするフィルム部材貼り付け装置。
    In the film member affixing device according to claim 10,
    Among the plurality of pressing rolls, the diameter of the pressing roll positioned on the side in contact with the film member is set to be smaller than the diameter of the other pressing rolls.
  12.  請求項1~11のいずれかに記載のフィルム部材貼り付け装置において、
     前記テンション付与部は、ダンサーロールであることを特徴とするフィルム部材貼り付け装置。
    In the film member affixing device according to any one of claims 1 to 11,
    The film applying device according to claim 1, wherein the tension applying unit is a dancer roll.
  13.  請求項1~12のいずれかに記載のフィルム部材貼り付け装置において、
     前記フィルム部材は、長尺シート状をなし、当該長尺シート状のフィルム部材の長手方向に沿って所定長さごとに前記リリースフィルムを残して切れ目が設けられており、前記剥がし部によってリリースフィルムが剥がされることにより、個片化されたフィルム部材となり、当該個片化されたフィルム部材が前記被貼り付け部材に貼り付けられることを特徴とするフィルム部材貼り付け装置。
    In the film member affixing device according to any one of claims 1 to 12,
    The film member is in the form of a long sheet, and the release film is left for each predetermined length along the longitudinal direction of the long sheet-like film member, and the release film is released by the peeling portion. A film member affixing device characterized by being separated into individualized film members, and the individualized film members being adhered to the member to be adhered.
  14.  請求項1~13のいずれかに記載のフィルム部材貼り付け装置において、
     前記フィルム部材は、液晶パネルに用いられる偏光フィルム若しくは保護フィルム又は電子機器に用いられる電磁波シールドフィルムであり、
     前記被貼り付け部材は、前記液晶パネルに用いられるガラス基板若しくは合成樹脂基板又は電子機器に用いられる電子回路基板である、
     ことを特徴とするフィルム部材貼り付け装置。
    In the film member affixing device according to any one of claims 1 to 13,
    The film member is a polarizing film or a protective film used for a liquid crystal panel or an electromagnetic wave shielding film used for an electronic device,
    The affixing member is a glass substrate or a synthetic resin substrate used for the liquid crystal panel, or an electronic circuit substrate used for an electronic device.
    Film member affixing device characterized in that.
  15.  一方の面が接着面となっており、当該接着面にリリースフィルムが剥離可能に貼付されているフィルム部材から前記リリースフィルムを剥がしながら前記フィルム部材を進行させて行き、前記リリースフィルムが剥がされた前記フィルム部材の進行方向先端部を、被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端に到達させるための「フィルム部材の頭出し動作」を行った後に、前記フィルム部材の進行方向先端部を前記被貼り付け部材の貼り付け始端に押さえ付けた状態で前記貼り付け始端を起点に前記リリースフィルムを剥がしながら前記フィルム部材を前記被貼り付け部材に貼り付けて行く「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」をフィルム部材貼り付け装置が行うフィルム部材貼り付け方法であって、
     前記フィルム部材貼り付け装置は、
     前記被貼り付け部材を載置するテーブルと、
     前記フィルム部材を供給するフィルム部材供給機構部と、
     前記「フィルム部材の頭出し動作」を行うために前記フィルム部材供給機構部を制御するフィルム部材頭出し制御機能と、前記「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」を行うために前記フィルム部材供給機構部及び前記テーブルの少なくとも一方を相対的に移動させる貼り付け制御機能とを有する制御装置と、
     を備え、
     前記フィルム部材供給機構部は、
     前記リリースフィルムを前記フィルム部材の進行方向とはほぼ反対方向に折り返す折り返し部を有し、当該折り返し部でリリースフィルムを折り返した状態で前記フィルム部材供給機構部及び前記テーブルの少なくとも一方が相対的に移動することによって前記フィルム部材からリリースフィルムを剥がす剥がし部と、
     前記折り返し部で折り返された前記リリースフィルムを進行させるリリースフィルム進行機構部と、
     を有し、
     前記リリースフィルム進行機構部には、
     前記折り返された前記リリースフィルムに対して前記リリースフィルムが進行する方向に沿ったテンションを付与するテンション付与部と、
     当該テンション付与部と前記剥がし部との間に配置され、前記「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」を行う際においては、前記リリースフィルムを前記テンション付与部と前記剥がし部との間の所定位置でクランプし、当該クランプした位置と前記剥がし部との間で、前記「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」に能動的に同期させて前記フィルム部材から前記リリースフィルムを剥がす動作を行う貼り付け/剥がし同期機構部と、
     が設けられており、
     前記「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」を行う際においては、
     前記リリースフィルムを前記テンション付与部と前記剥がし部との間の所定位置でクランプし、当該クランプした位置と前記剥がし部との間で、前記「フィルム部材の貼り付け動作」に能動的に同期させて前記フィルム部材から前記リリースフィルムを剥がす動作を行うことを特徴とするフィルム部材貼り付け方法。
    One surface is an adhesive surface, and the film member is advanced while peeling off the release film from the film member to which the release film is peelably attached to the adhesive surface, and the release film is peeled off After performing the "heading operation of the film member" for causing the forward end of the film member to reach the attachment start end of the affixing member, the forward end of the film member is the affixing member Bonding the film member to the member to be bonded while peeling off the release film starting from the bonding start end in a state of being pressed to the bonding start end of the film member It is a film member affixing method which an apparatus performs, and
    The film member affixing device is
    A table on which the affixing member is placed;
    A film member supply mechanism for supplying the film member;
    A film member indexing control function for controlling the film member feeding mechanism unit to perform the film member indexing operation, and the film member feeding mechanism unit to perform the film member attaching operation; A control device having a sticking control function of relatively moving at least one of the tables;
    Equipped with
    The film member supply mechanism unit
    It has a folded back portion that folds the release film back in a direction substantially opposite to the traveling direction of the film member, and in a state where the release film is folded back at the folded portion, at least one of the film member supply mechanism and the table is relatively A peeling section which peels the release film from the film member by moving;
    A release film advancing mechanism that advances the release film folded back at the folded back portion;
    Have
    The release film advancing mechanism unit
    A tension applying section for applying a tension along the direction in which the release film advances to the release film that has been folded back;
    The release film is disposed between the tension applying portion and the peeling portion, and the release film is clamped at a predetermined position between the tension applying portion and the peeling portion when performing the “pasting operation of the film member”. Between the clamped position and the peeling portion, the sticking / peeling synchronization mechanism portion performing an operation of peeling the release film from the film member in active synchronization with the “sticking operation of the film member”. When,
    Is provided,
    When performing the above-mentioned "film member pasting operation",
    The release film is clamped at a predetermined position between the tension applying portion and the peeling portion, and actively synchronized with the “pasting operation of the film member” between the clamped position and the peeling portion. A film member attaching method characterized by performing an operation of peeling the release film from the film member.
PCT/JP2018/042127 2017-12-05 2018-11-14 Film member attaching device and film member attaching method WO2019111662A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR1020207015749A KR20200076733A (en) 2017-12-05 2018-11-14 Film member pasting device and film member pasting method
CN201880078125.2A CN111433145B (en) 2017-12-05 2018-11-14 Film member bonding apparatus and film member bonding method

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2017-233772 2017-12-05
JP2017233772A JP6967272B2 (en) 2017-12-05 2017-12-05 Film member pasting device and film member pasting method

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019111662A1 true WO2019111662A1 (en) 2019-06-13

Family

ID=66750933

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2018/042127 WO2019111662A1 (en) 2017-12-05 2018-11-14 Film member attaching device and film member attaching method

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6967272B2 (en)
KR (1) KR20200076733A (en)
CN (1) CN111433145B (en)
WO (1) WO2019111662A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113400636A (en) * 2020-03-17 2021-09-17 Oppo(重庆)智能科技有限公司 Film pasting equipment

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN112875368B (en) * 2021-01-27 2023-05-09 重庆望变电气(集团)股份有限公司 Taper tension winding process after cold coating of silicon steel

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS4964400A (en) * 1972-10-20 1974-06-21
JP2009132529A (en) * 2007-12-03 2009-06-18 Lintec Corp Sheet pasting device and its method
JP2011251805A (en) * 2010-06-01 2011-12-15 Beac:Kk Plastic film laminating device
JP2014141271A (en) * 2013-01-23 2014-08-07 Disco Abrasive Syst Ltd Roller

Family Cites Families (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2004279698A (en) * 2003-03-14 2004-10-07 Seiko Epson Corp Apparatus and method for sticking filmy medium and apparatus and method for manufacturing electrooptical device
JP2007230740A (en) * 2006-03-02 2007-09-13 Tokyo Seimitsu Co Ltd Surface protective film peeling method and surface protective film peeling device
JP5010652B2 (en) * 2009-08-19 2012-08-29 株式会社東芝 Sheet peeling apparatus and display device manufacturing method
JP4503691B1 (en) * 2009-10-13 2010-07-14 日東電工株式会社 Method and apparatus for continuous production of liquid layer display element
JP2011116486A (en) * 2009-12-02 2011-06-16 Sharp Corp Film peeling device
JP5375586B2 (en) * 2009-12-22 2013-12-25 株式会社スリーボンド Peeling apparatus and peeling method
JP6412442B2 (en) * 2015-02-20 2018-10-24 リンテック株式会社 Sheet feeding apparatus and feeding method

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS4964400A (en) * 1972-10-20 1974-06-21
JP2009132529A (en) * 2007-12-03 2009-06-18 Lintec Corp Sheet pasting device and its method
JP2011251805A (en) * 2010-06-01 2011-12-15 Beac:Kk Plastic film laminating device
JP2014141271A (en) * 2013-01-23 2014-08-07 Disco Abrasive Syst Ltd Roller

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113400636A (en) * 2020-03-17 2021-09-17 Oppo(重庆)智能科技有限公司 Film pasting equipment

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN111433145A (en) 2020-07-17
JP6967272B2 (en) 2021-11-17
JP2019099346A (en) 2019-06-24
KR20200076733A (en) 2020-06-29
CN111433145B (en) 2021-08-31

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR101429152B1 (en) Film attachment apparatus and attachment method
JP2012084688A (en) Method of pasting double-sided adhesive tape, and device of pasting double-sided adhesive tape
WO2018116935A1 (en) Film adhesion device, film adhesion method, and guide member
JP2007160697A (en) Method and device for sticking film
JP2007062321A (en) Laminated film pasting device
WO2019111662A1 (en) Film member attaching device and film member attaching method
JP6461279B2 (en) Film member pasting device, film member pasting method and static electricity removing member
KR20190078799A (en) Protective film peeling device and system for attaching film to panel having the same
JP6957063B2 (en) Peeling device and peeling method
KR20160055338A (en) Method and apparatus for peeling off a film and method of manufacturing display device using the same
JP4708896B2 (en) Adhesive tape sticking device and sticking method
JP6461269B2 (en) Film member pasting apparatus, film member pasting method and guide member
KR100508291B1 (en) Labeling machine for attaching shielding sheets
JP2004155593A (en) Adhesion device for adhesive tape piece
JPH08133560A (en) Applying device and applying method of adhesive tape piece
JP2007273701A (en) Method for manufacturing flexible film and manufacturing device
JP2019048724A (en) Film member affixing device
WO2018207677A1 (en) Film member adhesion device, film member adhesion method, and static electricity removal member
JP2010149988A (en) Film strip peeling-off device
JP2005079275A (en) Resin tape sticking apparatus and sticking method
JP2004279698A (en) Apparatus and method for sticking filmy medium and apparatus and method for manufacturing electrooptical device
JP2014225587A (en) Device and method of tape attachment to substrate
JP7320696B2 (en) Adhesive tape supply device and supply method, sheet material peeling device and peeling method
KR101774219B1 (en) Non-Contact Type Peeling Apparatus and Method of Chemical Liquid Film, and Apparatus and Method of Bonding Substrates Having the Same
JP2023039883A (en) Film removal mechanism

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 18885718

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20207015749

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 18885718

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1